- All categories
Welcome to Wikbeauty
Main menu
-
SHOP All
-
Shop by Category
- Shop by Category
-
Body Contouring & Fat Reduction
-
Facial & Skin Rejuvenation
-
Recovery & Circulation Therapy
-
Bestsellers
Your cart
Product Comparison
Describe you product comparison grid
|
__ __ |
|
|---|---|
| Vendor |
Vendor - __ |
| SKU |
SKU - __ |
| Description |
Description - __ |
| Customizable title |
Customizable title - __ |
| Variant name |
Variant name - __ |
|
|
Compare products ( / )
All Machines
56 products
56 products
Sort by:
- Featured
- Most relevant
- Best selling
- Alphabetically, A-Z
- Alphabetically, Z-A
- Price, low to high
- Price, high to low
- Date, old to new
- Date, new to old
$1,499.00
Professional 7D HIFU Facial and Body Treatment System Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound for Skin Tightening, Facial Lifting, and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is a professional non-invasive aesthetic system developed for facial lifting, wrinkle care, skin tightening, collagen stimulation, and body-contouring treatments. High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound technology delivers concentrated ultrasound energy at selected tissue depths. Its multi-depth cartridge system supports customized treatments for superficial facial areas, deeper facial structures, and suitable body areas. With multiple treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm, seven treatment cartridges, adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and a compact portable design, the system is suitable for beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and professional skincare facilities. 7D HIFU technology | 1.5–16mm treatment depths | Seven cartridges | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at selected depths without requiring incisions or injectable products. Different cartridges allow professionals to target superficial, middle, and deeper tissue levels. Common applications include: Facial skin tightening Fine-line and wrinkle care Jawline contouring Neck and décolletage treatments Body skin-firming programs Professional body-contouring treatments Facial Lifting and Collagen Stimulation
Facial cartridges are designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at depths suitable for different layers of facial tissue. Common applications include: Reduced facial firmness Fine lines and wrinkles Lower-face laxity Jawline definition Double-chin-area treatments Neck skin tightening Body Contouring and Skin Firming
Deeper cartridge configurations support professional treatments for suitable body areas. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Upper-arm treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin tightening Cellulite-appearance improvement Select the Right Program for Each Client Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses suitable facial cartridges and customized energy settings for general facial lifting and skin-rejuvenation treatments. Recommended applications: Fine lines and wrinkles Reduced facial firmness Uneven-looking skin texture Early signs of aging General collagen-stimulation programs Recommended for: Clients seeking non-invasive facial rejuvenation Clients concerned about visible signs of aging Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement Facial-Lifting and Jawline Program
Uses suitable middle and deeper facial treatment depths to support lower-face tightening and contour definition. Recommended applications: Lower-face laxity Reduced jawline definition Jowl-area treatments Double-chin concerns Neck skin tightening Recommended for: Clients seeking a firmer-looking lower face Clients concerned about facial contours Clients interested in non-surgical lifting programs Body-Contouring Program
Uses deeper body cartridges for suitable body areas requiring contouring and skin-firming treatments. Recommended applications: Abdomen contouring Upper-arm treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin tightening Recommended for: Clients concerned about localized body areas Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial HIFU program. Recommended applications: Facial-lifting maintenance Skin-firming maintenance Body-contour maintenance Continued collagen-stimulation programs Recommended for: Returning HIFU clients Clients completing an initial treatment plan Clients seeking periodic professional maintenance Adjustable Treatment Depths and Energy Settings
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine provides multiple treatment depths for different facial and body applications. The supplied product information describes a seven-cartridge package while listing treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm. The exact included cartridge configuration should be confirmed when placing the order. Energy settings should be selected according to the cartridge, treatment area, tissue condition, client comfort, and professional protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Face, Chin, and Jawline
Facial cartridges support customized treatments across suitable areas of the face. Common treatment objectives include: Facial lifting Fine-line care Wrinkle reduction Jawline definition Double-chin-area treatment Neck and Décolletage
Suitable cartridge depths and controlled energy settings can support professional tightening and rejuvenation programs. Common treatment objectives include: Neck skin tightening Reduced appearance of neck lines Improved-looking firmness Décolletage rejuvenation Collagen-stimulation support Arms, Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
Deeper cartridge configurations support selected body-contouring and skin-firming treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Abdomen treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin firming Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures, target areas, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Cartridge Selection
Select the appropriate facial or body cartridge according to the treatment area, target depth, tissue condition, and professional protocol. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the treatment area and apply suitable ultrasound gel. Configure the energy level and treatment parameters according to the selected cartridge and client tolerance. Step 4: HIFU Treatment
Position the handpiece correctly and deliver focused ultrasound energy according to the mapped treatment plan. Monitor client comfort and tissue response throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the ultrasound gel, inspect and clean the treated area, record the cartridge and settings used, and provide appropriate post-treatment skincare guidance. Designed for Professional Beauty Environments The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine combines multi-depth facial and body treatment capability with a compact professional design. Key advantages include: Professional 7D HIFU technology Treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm Seven-cartridge package configuration Facial and body treatment capability Adjustable energy settings Intelligent touchscreen controls Approximately 30–60-minute sessions Facial lifting and wrinkle-care programs Jawline and chin contouring Neck and décolletage treatments Body-contouring and skin-firming programs Compact and portable construction 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU main unit 1 × Professional HIFU treatment handpiece Seven treatment cartridges according to the selected package Facial treatment cartridge configurations Body treatment cartridge configurations Intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories The exact seven-cartridge combination should be confirmed before ordering because the supplied information lists eight available treatment depths. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Cartridge-selection guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Facial treatment protocols Jawline and neck protocols Body-contouring protocols Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Facial and body assessment Treatment-area mapping Cartridge selection Energy-level adjustment Handpiece positioning Facial-lifting protocols Jawline and neck protocols Body-contouring protocols Post-treatment care Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Cartridges and other components subject to normal use or shot limitations are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable cartridges, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation, health-history review, and skin assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Active skin infection Herpes, open wounds, or sores Active eczema, psoriasis, or dermatitis in the area Severe or recent sunburn Recent surgery within the treatment area Recent injectable or aggressive skin treatments Serious cardiovascular or medical conditions Reduced or impaired skin sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients who have recently received fillers, botulinum toxin, chemical peels, or other professional aesthetic procedures should be assessed before treatment. An appropriate waiting period should be determined by a qualified practitioner. HIFU should not be applied over the eyes, thyroid gland, major nerves, bones, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cartridges, cables, and accessories before use. Confirm the cartridge and depth before beginning treatment. Map the treatment area carefully. Apply sufficient ultrasound gel. Begin with conservative energy settings. Monitor client comfort and tissue response. Do not deliver energy over prohibited anatomical areas. Do not repeatedly treat the same point outside the protocol. Record the cartridge, depth, energy, and treatment area. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring clinics Professional spas Anti-aging treatment centers Professional skincare facilities Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIFU treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine? Multi-Depth HIFU Technology
Treatment depths spanning 1.5mm to 16mm support superficial facial treatments, deeper facial lifting, and selected body applications. Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports treatments for the face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks. Adjustable Professional Settings
Interchangeable cartridges and adjustable energy controls allow professionals to customize treatments according to the area and client. Compact Portable Design
The portable construction and intelligent touchscreen make the machine suitable for different treatment rooms and professional beauty environments. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, cartridge guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine?
It is a professional High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound system developed for facial lifting, skin tightening, wrinkle care, collagen stimulation, and selected body-contouring treatments. What does 7D HIFU mean?
The product uses a multi-depth HIFU cartridge system designed to treat different facial and body tissue levels. The supplied package is described as containing seven treatment cartridges. Which treatment depths are available?
The supplied information lists depths of 1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm. How many cartridges are included?
The package is described as including seven cartridges. Because eight treatment depths are listed in the supplied information, the exact included combination should be confirmed before ordering. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, chin, jawline, upper arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks. How long does one session take?
A standard professional treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the treatment area, cartridge, and protocol. How many treatments are recommended?
The supplied information suggests one to three sessions per year. The final treatment schedule should be personalized according to the client’s condition, objectives, and professional assessment. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice an initial tightening effect following treatment. Progressive changes may continue as the skin’s natural collagen response develops. Individual outcomes and timing vary. How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of 12–18 months. Actual longevity varies according to age, skin condition, treatment settings, lifestyle, and individual response. Is there downtime?
Many clients can continue normal daily activities after a suitable treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, or sensitivity may occur. What does HIFU treatment feel like?
Clients may experience warmth, tingling, pressure, or brief sensitivity as ultrasound energy is delivered. Energy should be adjusted according to professional protocol and client tolerance. Can this machine be used for body treatments?
Yes. The deeper cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the arms, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to age, tissue condition, treatment area, cartridge selection, energy settings, lifestyle, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment mapping, cartridge selection, energy adjustment, facial and body protocols, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Professional 7D HIFU Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine enables beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and skincare professionals to provide customizable facial-lifting, skin-tightening, wrinkle-care, and body-contouring services using one professional platform. Five key benefits: Multi-depth focused ultrasound treatments from 1.5mm to 16mm Professional facial and body treatment capability Seven-cartridge package with adjustable energy settings Compact portable design with intelligent touchscreen controls CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, exact cartridge configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment Depth
General Treatment Level
Possible Applications
1.5mm
Superficial facial tissue
Fine lines, texture, and delicate facial areas
3.0mm
Dermal facial layer
Collagen stimulation and skin tightening
4.5mm
Deeper facial layer
Facial lifting, jawline, and lower-face treatments
6.0mm
Shallow body treatment
Small body areas and skin-firming programs
8.0mm
Medium body treatment
Arms and selected body areas
10.0mm
Deeper body treatment
Abdomen, thighs, and body contouring
13.0mm
Deep body treatment
Larger body areas
16.0mm
Maximum listed body depth
Professional deep body-contouring protocols
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Depth Category
Face
Lifting, tightening, and wrinkle care
1.5mm, 3.0mm, or 4.5mm
Chin and Jawline
Contour definition and lower-face tightening
Suitable facial depth
Neck
Skin tightening and line care
Suitable facial depth
Décolletage
Texture and firmness improvement
Professionally selected depth
Upper Arms
Skin firming and contouring
Suitable body depth
Abdomen
Body contouring and tightening
Suitable deeper body depth
Thighs
Contouring and cellulite-appearance care
Suitable body depth
Buttocks
Skin-firming and contouring support
Suitable body depth
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound
Treatment Package
Seven multi-depth cartridges
Listed Treatment Depths
1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm
Facial Depths
1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm
Body Depths
6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm
Primary Functions
Skin tightening, facial lifting, wrinkle care, and body contouring
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes
Treatment Frequency
Personalized according to client assessment
Energy Settings
Adjustable
Display
Intelligent touchscreen
Design
Compact and portable
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
From $549.00
Professional HIEMT and Radiofrequency Body Sculpting System
Four Treatment Handles for Muscle Stimulation and Body-Contouring Programs
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine is a professional dual-technology platform developed for fitness centers, medical spas, wellness clinics and body-sculpting studios.
The system combines High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic technology with controlled radiofrequency energy. HIEMT produces repeated contractions in selected muscle groups, while RF provides controlled thermal energy for suitable body-care and skin-firming protocols.
Four treatment handles support individual or simultaneous multi-area programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms, calves and obliques. The system can be upgraded to six or eight handles.
HIEMT and RF technology | Four treatment handles | 16-Tesla magnetic field | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Body-Sculpting Platform HIEMT Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic technology delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses to selected muscle groups. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle stimulation Gluteal muscle programs Thigh conditioning Upper-arm stimulation Calf-muscle programs General body conditioning Radiofrequency Energy
The RF function provides controlled heating across suitable treatment areas. Common applications include: Skin-firming support Body-contour refinement Abdomen treatments Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs General body-care services Repeated Muscle Contractions
The system produces repeated contractions in the targeted muscle group during a treatment session. Common applications include: Core-conditioning support Muscle-activation programs Muscle-toning services Fitness-oriented treatments Body-sculpting programs Maintenance sessions Four-Handle Multi-Area Treatment
Four handles allow practitioners to create individual or simultaneous treatment protocols. Common applications include: Abdomen and obliques Left and right thighs Buttocks and thighs Upper arms Calves Customized multi-area programs The appropriate handle placement, HIEMT intensity, RF temperature and session duration should be selected according to the muscle group, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client The system supports customized HIEMT and RF programs for different body areas. Program 1: Abdomen and Core
A muscle-conditioning program for suitable abdominal and deep-core muscle areas. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle stimulation Core-conditioning support Abdomen contour programs Oblique muscle stimulation Recommended for: Fitness enthusiasts Body-sculpting clients Busy professionals Appropriately assessed post-pregnancy clients Program 2: Buttocks and Gluteal Muscles
A targeted program for suitable gluteal muscle groups. Recommended applications: Gluteal muscle stimulation Buttock-conditioning programs Muscle-tone support Lower-body contour care Recommended for: Fitness clients Body-contouring studios Wellness-center members Clients seeking lower-body conditioning Program 3: Thighs and Calves
A lower-body program for suitable thigh and calf muscle groups. Recommended applications: Quadriceps stimulation Hamstring programs Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Calf-muscle activation Recommended for: Athletes Fitness enthusiasts Lower-body conditioning programs Professional wellness services Program 4: Upper Arms
A targeted program for suitable biceps, triceps and forearm areas. Recommended applications: Biceps stimulation Triceps stimulation Forearm conditioning Upper-arm contour support Recommended for: Fitness-center clients Upper-body programs Body-sculpting services Customized muscle-conditioning plans Adjustable Energy for Customized Treatments The EMSlim HIEMT Machine provides adjustable HIEMT intensity and radiofrequency settings for different body areas and client tolerance levels. The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over contraction intensity, RF energy and client comfort. New clients should begin with conservative HIEMT and RF settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Four treatment handles support professional programs across multiple body areas. Core and Upper-Body Treatments Abdomen Core muscles Obliques Biceps Triceps Forearms Lower-Body Treatments
Buttocks Quadriceps Hamstrings Inner thighs Outer thighs Calves Combined Body Programs
Abdomen and obliques Abdomen and thighs Buttocks and thighs Left and right upper arms Customized multi-area courses Maintenance-oriented programs Professional Muscle and Body-Contouring Applications
The available treatments depend on handle placement, HIEMT intensity, RF settings, session duration and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete health and fitness consultation should be performed before every treatment course. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, fitness level, treatment objectives, previous procedures and contraindications. 2. Handle Placement
The selected treatment areas are prepared. Conductive gel is applied where required, and the treatment handles are positioned and secured according to the operating protocol. 3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the HIEMT intensity, RF settings, treatment program and session duration according to the muscle group and client tolerance. 4. HIEMT and RF Treatment
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses and controlled RF energy through the selected handles. A typical treatment lasts approximately 30 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the handles are removed and the treatment areas are cleaned. The client receives suitable hydration, activity and recovery guidance. Temporary warmth, muscle fatigue, tightness, soreness or cramping may occur after treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines HIEMT and RF technologies with four treatment handles and professional cooling for continuous operation. Key operating advantages include: HIEMT electromagnetic stimulation Controlled radiofrequency energy 16-Tesla magnetic field Four treatment handles Upgradeable six- or eight-handle configurations Pre-programmed treatment protocols Water-cooling system 110V–240V power compatibility Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment handles and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One EMSlim HIEMT main unit Four HIEMT and RF treatment handles Handle-positioning straps Handle-connection components One starter bottle of conductive gel Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Treatment table when included with the selected order Documentation and Training
English operating manual Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup Handle-placement guidance HIEMT-intensity adjustment RF-setting guidance Pre-programmed treatment protocols Client-positioning guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Setup assistance Certificate of Authenticity Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Treatment-handle installation Handle placement by muscle group HIEMT-intensity adjustment RF parameter selection Abdomen and core programs Gluteal muscle programs Thigh and leg programs Upper-arm programs Multi-handle operation Client-comfort monitoring Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting Three-Year Warranty
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine is supported by a three-year comprehensive warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system HIEMT energy components Radiofrequency components Water-cooling system Original treatment handles Handle cables and connectors Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect handle placement or operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of straps, cables and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional high-intensity electromagnetic and radiofrequency equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Epilepsy or uncontrolled seizure disorders Severe neurological conditions Active or suspected blood clots Hernia in the treatment area Recent surgery Open wounds or severe skin conditions Acute inflammation Severe muscle injury Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Post-pregnancy clients require appropriate medical clearance. Abdominal separation, recent delivery, cesarean recovery and pelvic-floor condition should be assessed before treatment. RF temperature and HIEMT intensity must remain within the client’s tolerance throughout the session. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Fitness centers Medical spas Wellness clinics Body-sculpting studios Beauty salons Sports and recovery centers Trained independent practitioners Qualified aesthetic professionals Businesses expanding their body-conditioning services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine? Combine HIEMT and RF
The system combines electromagnetic muscle stimulation with controlled radiofrequency energy in one professional platform. Treat Multiple Body Areas
Four handles support professional programs for the abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves. Customize Every Session
Adjustable HIEMT intensity, RF settings and pre-programmed protocols allow treatments to be adapted to different muscle groups and client tolerance. Expand the System
The standard four-handle configuration can be upgraded to six or eight handles for greater treatment capacity. Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year comprehensive warranty, professional training, setup assistance and ongoing customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does the EMSlim HIEMT Machine work?
The machine combines HIEMT electromagnetic pulses with controlled radiofrequency energy. HIEMT produces repeated contractions in selected muscles, while RF provides controlled heating for suitable body-care protocols. What is the 16-Tesla electromagnetic field?
The supplied specification describes a 16-Tesla magnetic-field output used to deliver high-intensity electromagnetic stimulation through the treatment handles. What does the four-handle design provide?
Four handles allow practitioners to treat individual or multiple suitable body areas during one session. The system can also be upgraded to six or eight handles. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, biceps, triceps, forearms and calves. How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional course may include approximately 4–6 sessions, commonly scheduled one or two times per week. The final protocol depends on the client’s condition and professional assessment. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients feel repeated muscle contractions and warmth from RF. The intensity and RF settings should remain within the client’s tolerance. Can muscle soreness occur?
Yes. Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness or soreness may occur, similar to the response after physical exercise. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue, soreness, warmth or redness may occur. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The comprehensive warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Add HIEMT and RF Body Sculpting to Your Business
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine combines: High-intensity focused electromagnetic stimulation Controlled radiofrequency energy Four treatment handles with upgrade options Professional multi-area body-conditioning programs Three-year comprehensive warranty and ongoing support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its handle configurations, treatment protocols and professional training. Order Your EMSlim HIEMT Machine and Request Pricing Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Intensity
First-time clients and initial muscle activation
Moderate Intensity
General professional muscle-conditioning programs
Higher Intensity
Appropriately selected experienced clients
Customized HIEMT and RF
Muscle-specific protocols based on professional assessment
Treatment Area
Applicable Technology
Intended Fitness or Aesthetic Application
Abdomen
HIEMT and RF
Core stimulation and contour support
Obliques
HIEMT and RF
Side-body muscle conditioning
Buttocks
HIEMT
Gluteal muscle stimulation
Thighs
HIEMT and RF
Lower-body conditioning
Upper arms
HIEMT and RF
Biceps and triceps stimulation
Calves
HIEMT
Calf-muscle activation
Multiple areas
Four-handle operation
Simultaneous professional treatment
Maintenance
Customized program
Ongoing muscle and body-care support
Specification
Details
Product Name
EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine
Machine Power
6500W
Magnetic Field Strength
16 Tesla
RF Function
Yes, built-in radiofrequency
Net Weight
Approximately 59 kg
Machine Dimensions
49 × 56 × 74 cm
Display
15.6-inch intelligent touchscreen
Product Type
Professional HIEMT and RF body-sculpting system
Technology
High-intensity electromagnetic technology stimulation and radiofrequency
Treatment Handles
Four, upgradeable to six or eight
Programmed Contractions
More than 20,000 to 30000 per session
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes
Suggested Protocol
Approximately 4–6 sessions, one or two times per week
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, arms and calves
Control Interface
Touchscreen with pre-programmed protocols
Cooling System
Water-cooled for continuous professional operation
Power Supply
110V–240V
Warranty
Three-year comprehensive warranty
Support
Customer support by email, telephone and WhatsApp
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
From $1,899.00
Professional High-Intensity Electromagnetic Body Sculpting System
Adjustable Muscle Stimulation for Customized Body-Conditioning Programs
The Emslim Gold Magnetic is a professional high-intensity electromagnetic muscle-stimulation platform developed for fitness centers, medical spas, wellness clinics and body-sculpting studios.
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses that produce repeated contractions in selected muscle groups. Adjustable intensity settings allow trained practitioners to create customized programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves.
Professional treatment courses can be incorporated into muscle-conditioning, body-contouring and fitness-support services.
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation | Adjustable intensity | Multiple body areas | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Body-Sculpting Platform Electromagnetic Pulse Delivery
The system delivers high-intensity electromagnetic pulses through treatment applicators positioned over suitable muscle groups. Common applications include: Abdomen treatments Gluteal muscle programs Thigh treatments Upper-arm stimulation Calf-muscle programs General body conditioning Repeated Muscle Contractions
Programmed electromagnetic energy produces repeated contractions in the targeted muscle group during a treatment session. Common applications include: Muscle-activation programs Core-conditioning support Muscle-toning services Fitness-oriented treatments Body-sculpting programs Maintenance sessions Muscle-Conditioning Support
Repeated contractions can be incorporated into professionally planned programs intended to support muscle tone and definition. Common applications include: Abdominal conditioning Gluteal muscle stimulation Thigh-muscle programs Upper-arm conditioning Calf-muscle stimulation General fitness support Body-Contour Support
The machine can be incorporated into broader body-contouring programs for appropriately selected clients. Common applications include: Abdomen and waist programs Buttock-contour support Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs Post-weight-management body care Combination fitness services The appropriate applicator placement, intensity and session duration should be selected according to the muscle group, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The system supports customized electromagnetic muscle-stimulation programs for different body areas. Program 1: Abdomen and Core
A muscle-conditioning program for suitable abdominal and core-muscle areas. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle stimulation Core-conditioning support Abdomen contour programs General muscle-toning services Recommended for: Fitness enthusiasts Body-sculpting clients Busy professionals Appropriately assessed post-pregnancy clients Program 2: Buttocks and Gluteal Muscles
A targeted program for suitable gluteal muscle groups. Recommended applications: Gluteal muscle stimulation Buttock-conditioning programs Muscle-tone support Lower-body body-sculpting services Recommended for: Fitness clients Body-contouring studios Wellness-center members Clients seeking lower-body conditioning Program 3: Thighs and Legs
A lower-body program for suitable thigh and calf muscle groups. Recommended applications: Quadriceps stimulation Hamstring programs Thigh conditioning Calf-muscle activation Recommended for: Athletes Fitness enthusiasts Lower-body conditioning programs Professional wellness services Program 4: Upper Arms
A targeted program for suitable biceps and triceps areas. Recommended applications: Biceps stimulation Triceps stimulation Upper-arm conditioning Muscle-tone support Recommended for: Fitness-center clients Upper-body programs Body-sculpting services Customized muscle-conditioning plans Adjustable Intensity for Customized Muscle Stimulation
The Emslim Gold Magnetic provides adjustable electromagnetic intensity for different muscle groups and client tolerance levels. The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over contraction intensity and client comfort. New clients should begin with a lower intensity before the setting is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Multiple treatment applicators support professional muscle-stimulation programs across several body areas. Core and Upper-Body Treatments Abdomen Core muscles Biceps Triceps Other suitable upper-body muscle groups Lower-Body Treatments
Buttocks Quadriceps Hamstrings Thighs Calves Other suitable lower-body muscle groups Combined Body Programs
Abdomen and buttocks Abdomen and thighs Buttocks and thighs Upper arms Customized multi-area courses Maintenance-oriented programs Professional Muscle and Body-Conditioning Applications
The available treatments depend on applicator placement, intensity, session duration and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete health and fitness consultation should be performed before every treatment course. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, fitness level, treatment goals, recent procedures and contraindications. 2. Applicator Placement
The appropriate treatment applicators are positioned and secured over the selected muscle groups according to the operating protocol. 3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the treatment program, electromagnetic intensity and session duration according to the muscle group and client tolerance. 4. Electromagnetic Treatment
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses that produce repeated contractions in the selected muscles. A typical session lasts approximately 30 minutes per treatment area. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the applicators are removed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and recovery guidance. Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness, soreness or cramping may occur following treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines adjustable electromagnetic technology with intuitive controls and professional treatment applicators. Key operating advantages include: High-intensity electromagnetic stimulation Programmed repeated contractions Adjustable treatment intensity Multiple body-area applicators 30-minute treatment programs LCD control interface Automatic safety controls Dual-voltage compatibility Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, electromagnetic treatment applicators and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Emslim Gold Magnetic main unit Professional electromagnetic treatment applicators Applicator-positioning straps Handle-connection components Required treatment cables Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-applicator setup Applicator-placement guidance Intensity-adjustment instructions Muscle-group treatment programs Client-positioning guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup LCD control operation Applicator installation Applicator placement by muscle group Intensity adjustment Abdomen and core programs Gluteal muscle programs Thigh and leg programs Upper-arm programs Client-comfort monitoring Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Emslim Gold Magnetic is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components LCD control system Electromagnetic energy components Original treatment applicators Applicator cables and connectors Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect applicator placement or operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of straps, cables and external components Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional high-intensity electromagnetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Epilepsy or uncontrolled seizure disorders Severe neurological conditions Active or suspected blood clots Hernia in the treatment area Recent surgery Open wounds or severe skin conditions Acute inflammation Severe muscle injury Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Post-pregnancy clients require appropriate medical clearance. Abdominal separation, recent delivery, cesarean recovery and pelvic-floor condition should be professionally assessed before treatment. The selected intensity must remain within the client’s tolerance throughout the session. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Fitness centers Medical spas Wellness clinics Body-sculpting studios Beauty salons Sports and recovery centers Trained independent practitioners Qualified aesthetic professionals Businesses expanding their muscle-conditioning services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the Emslim Gold Magnetic?
Provide Intensive Muscle Stimulation
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses that produce repeated contractions in selected muscle groups. Treat Multiple Body Areas
Professional applicators support programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves. Customize Every Session
Adjustable intensity settings allow treatments to be adapted to different muscle groups, fitness levels and client tolerance. Expand Your Service Menu
The system supports core-conditioning, gluteal, thigh, upper-arm, calf and comprehensive body-sculpting programs. Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does Emslim Gold Magnetic work?
The system delivers high-intensity electromagnetic pulses through treatment applicators positioned over selected muscle groups. These pulses produce repeated muscle contractions during the session. What are supramaximal contractions?
The term describes intense, externally induced muscle contractions produced by electromagnetic stimulation. The contraction level depends on applicator placement and selected intensity. How many contractions occur during a session?
The supplied specification describes approximately 20,000–30,000 programmed contractions during a 30-minute session. Which areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, biceps, triceps and calves. How long does a session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30 minutes per treatment area. How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course may include approximately 6–8 sessions over 3–4 weeks. The final schedule depends on the client’s condition and professional assessment. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients feel repeated muscle contractions that can become intense as the setting increases. The intensity should remain within the client’s tolerance. Can muscle soreness occur?
Yes. Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness or soreness may occur, similar to the response after physical exercise. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness may occur. Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, applicator placement, intensity adjustment, body-area programs, safety, cleaning and maintenance. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation to Your Business
The Emslim Gold Magnetic combines: High-intensity electromagnetic stimulation Programmed repeated muscle contractions Adjustable treatment intensity Professional multi-area body-conditioning programs Three-year parts warranty and customer support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment applicators, muscle programs and professional training. Order Your Emslim Gold Magnetic and Request Pricing Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Intensity Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Intensity
First-time clients and initial muscle activation
Moderate Intensity
General professional conditioning programs
Higher Intensity
Appropriately selected experienced clients
Customized Program
Muscle-specific settings based on professional assessment
Treatment Area
Applicable Program
Intended Fitness Application
Abdomen
Core Program
Abdominal muscle stimulation
Deep core
Customized Program
Core-conditioning support
Buttocks
Gluteal Program
Gluteal muscle stimulation
Thighs
Lower-Body Program
Quadriceps and hamstring conditioning
Upper arms
Arm Program
Biceps and triceps stimulation
Calves
Lower-Leg Program
Calf-muscle activation
Multiple areas
Customized Course
Comprehensive body-conditioning support
Maintenance
Lower-Intensity Program
Ongoing muscle-stimulation services
Specification
Details
Product Name
Emslim Gold Magnetic
Machine Power
6500W
Magnetic Field Strength
14 Tesla
RF Function
Yes, built-in radiofrequency
Net Weight
Approximately 49 kg
Machine Dimensions
63 × 41 × 51 cm
Display
10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen
Product Type
Professional electromagnetic muscle-stimulation system
Technology
High-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation
Programmed Contractions
Up to approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes per treatment area
Intensity Levels
Adjustable
Treatment Applicators
Multiple handles for different muscle groups
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves
Control Interface
LCD screen with professional controls
Power Supply
110V and 220V
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, client-safety sensors and overload protection
Design
Professional clinic and salon system
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and customer assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
From $2,399.00
Professional RF and EMS Body Sculpting System
Four Treatment Handles for Simultaneous Muscle Stimulation and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova is a dual-technology body-sculpting platform developed for fitness clinics, medical spas, aesthetic centers and professional beauty salons.
The system combines radiofrequency energy with electromagnetic muscle stimulation. Four treatment handles allow trained operators to create customized protocols for the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, back and gluteal areas.
Adjustable RF energy and EMS intensity provide treatment flexibility for different body areas, muscle groups, fitness levels and professional objectives.
RF and EMS technology | Four treatment handles | Multiple body areas | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Body Sculpting Platform Radiofrequency Energy
The RF function delivers controlled thermal energy to suitable body tissue while supporting professional skin-firming and contour-refinement programs. Common applications include: Skin-firming treatments Body-contour refinement Abdomen treatments Waist and flank programs Thigh treatments General body-care services Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
The EMS function produces controlled muscle contractions in the selected treatment area. Common applications include: Muscle-stimulation programs Core-activation treatments Muscle-toning support Fitness-oriented services Body-conditioning programs Maintenance sessions Simultaneous RF and EMS Treatment
The system combines adjustable RF energy and electromagnetic stimulation within one professional platform. Common applications include: Combined body-sculpting programs Muscle stimulation with skin-firming support Abdomen and core treatments Thigh and gluteal programs Multi-session fitness packages Customized body-care services Four-Handle Multi-Area Treatment
Four treatment handles allow the operator to work on multiple suitable body areas during one session. Common applications include: Abdomen and flanks Left and right thighs Upper arms Back areas Gluteal muscles Customized multi-area programs The appropriate handle placement, RF setting, EMS intensity and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, muscle group, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Body Area The system supports customizable body-sculpting programs. The appropriate program should be selected following consultation and client assessment. Program 1: Abdomen and Core
A body-sculpting program designed for the abdomen and suitable core-muscle areas. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle stimulation Core-activation support Abdomen skin-firming programs Central body-contour refinement Recommended for: Fitness clinics Body-contouring studios Post-weight-management clients Clients seeking improved abdominal definition Program 2: Waist and Flanks
A targeted program for suitable areas around the waist and sides of the body. Recommended applications: Waist-contour refinement Flank treatments Side-body muscle stimulation Skin-firming support Recommended for: Waist-sculpting programs Multi-area packages Fitness-oriented treatments Aesthetic body-care services Program 3: Arms and Thighs
A customizable program for suitable upper-arm and thigh areas. Recommended applications: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Thigh-conditioning programs Skin-firming support General limb contouring Recommended for: Arm-toning services Lower-body programs Fitness-clinic clients Professional body-sculpting packages Program 4: Glutes and Back
A targeted program for suitable gluteal muscles and back areas. Recommended applications: Gluteal muscle stimulation Buttock-conditioning support Back muscle programs Body-contour refinement Recommended for: Glute-focused treatments Fitness and conditioning programs Multi-area body services Clinics expanding their treatment menu Dual-Energy Control for Customized Body Sculpting
The RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova provides adjustable RF energy and customizable EMS intensity. Each setting should be selected according to the treatment area, muscle group, client tolerance and professional objective. The adjustable controls give trained operators greater flexibility over thermal energy, muscle-stimulation intensity and client comfort. New clients should begin with lower settings before RF energy or EMS intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Four treatment handles support individual and simultaneous multi-area protocols. Upper-Body Treatments
Upper arms Suitable back areas Flanks Side body Other professionally assessed areas Core and Lower-Body Treatments
Abdomen Core muscles Waist Thighs Gluteal muscles Multi-Area Treatments
Abdomen and flanks Left and right thighs Upper arms Glutes and thighs Customized four-handle placement Professional full-body programs Professional Body Sculpting Applications
The available treatments depend on handle placement, RF energy, EMS intensity, session duration and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s health history, fitness level, treatment objectives and contraindications. Suitable treatment areas are then identified. 2. Handle Preparation
The required treatment areas are prepared according to the operating protocol. Conductive gel is applied where required, and the treatment handles are positioned and secured correctly. 3. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the RF energy, EMS intensity, treatment duration and available preset program according to the treatment area and client tolerance. 4. RF and EMS Treatment
The system delivers controlled RF energy and electromagnetic muscle stimulation through the selected handles. A typical treatment session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the session, the handles are removed and the treatment areas are cleaned. The client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance. Temporary warmth, redness, muscle fatigue, tingling or soreness may occur following treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines intelligent touchscreen controls with four RF and EMS treatment handles for efficient professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Four RF and EMS treatment handles Simultaneous multi-area operation Adjustable RF energy Customizable EMS intensity Intelligent digital touchscreen Preset treatment protocols 20–30-minute sessions 110V–240V power compatibility Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment handles and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova control system Four RF and EMS treatment handles Handle-connection components Handle-positioning accessories Starter conductive gel Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup instructions Handle-placement guidance RF-energy selection EMS-intensity selection Body-treatment protocols Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Treatment-handle connections Handle placement and securing RF-energy adjustment EMS-intensity adjustment Treatment-program selection Multi-area protocols Client positioning Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova is supported by a three-year parts and labor warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Intelligent touchscreen Original treatment handles Handle-connection components RF and EMS control components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect handle placement or operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of cables and external components Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional RF and electromagnetic muscle-stimulation equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Severe cardiovascular conditions Epilepsy Active or suspected blood clots Open wounds or active infections Severe skin conditions in the treatment area Recent surgery Abdominal or inguinal hernia Severe muscle or nerve disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Treatment handles must not be positioned over the head, front or side of the neck, heart, implanted devices or other prohibited areas. RF temperature, EMS intensity and client comfort must be monitored throughout the session. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Fitness clinics Medical spas Aesthetic clinics Professional beauty salons Body-contouring studios Gyms and wellness centers Trained body-sculpting practitioners Qualified healthcare professionals Businesses expanding their fitness services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova? Combine Two Technologies
The system combines adjustable radiofrequency energy and electromagnetic muscle stimulation in one professional platform. Treat Multiple Body Areas
Four treatment handles support individual or simultaneous protocols for the abdomen, flanks, arms, thighs, back and gluteal areas. Customize Every Session
Adjustable RF energy, EMS intensity and preset treatment programs allow sessions to be adapted to different body areas and client fitness levels. Expand Your Service Menu
The system can support muscle-stimulation programs, skin-firming services, body-contour treatments and fitness-oriented packages. Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year parts and labor warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and lifetime technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does the RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova work?
The system combines controlled radiofrequency energy with electromagnetic stimulation. RF supports thermal body-care and skin-firming programs, while EMS produces controlled contractions in selected muscle groups. How is this system different from an EMS-only machine?
An EMS-only machine provides muscle stimulation. The EMSlim Nova combines EMS with adjustable radiofrequency energy in one system for integrated muscle and body-care protocols. What does the four-handle design provide?
Four handles allow operators to treat multiple suitable body areas during one session. Handle placement depends on the selected protocol and client assessment. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, gluteal muscles and selected back areas. How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. The exact duration depends on the treatment area, handle placement, selected program and professional protocol. How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course may include approximately 6–12 sessions. The final number and frequency depend on the client’s condition, goals and response. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients commonly feel warmth from RF energy and controlled muscle contractions from EMS. Settings should be adjusted to remain within the client’s tolerance. Can muscle soreness occur?
Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness may occur after treatment, particularly during the first sessions or when higher EMS intensity is used. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary warmth, redness, fatigue or muscle soreness may occur. Is professional training included?
Remote professional training covers system setup, handle placement, RF settings, EMS intensity, treatment protocols, cleaning, maintenance and safety. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts and labor warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add RF and EMS Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova combines: Radiofrequency and EMS technology Four simultaneous treatment handles Adjustable energy and intensity controls Professional multi-area body applications Three-year warranty and lifetime support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment handles, professional protocols and training support. Order Your RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova and Request a Quote Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment Setting
Recommended Application
Lower RF and EMS Settings
First-time clients and comfort-focused programs
Moderate RF and EMS Settings
General body-sculpting and muscle-stimulation treatments
Higher EMS Intensity
Appropriately selected fitness-oriented muscle programs
Customized Dual Technology
Combined RF and EMS protocols for specific body areas
Treatment Area
Applicable Technology
Intended Aesthetic Application
Abdomen
RF and EMS
Core stimulation and contour support
Waist and flanks
RF and EMS
Waist-contour refinement
Upper arms
RF and EMS
Muscle stimulation and skin-firming support
Thighs
RF and EMS
Lower-body conditioning
Gluteal muscles
EMS with adjustable RF
Muscle-stimulation and contour programs
Back
RF and EMS
Muscle-conditioning and body-care support
Multiple body areas
Four-handle operation
Simultaneous professional treatment
Fitness clients
Customized dual technology
Body-conditioning programs
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova
Machine Power
8500W
Magnetic Field Strength
15 Tesla
RF Function
Yes, built-in radiofrequency
Net Weight
Approximately 60 kg
Machine Dimensions
66 × 52 × 113 cm
Display
8-inch intelligent touchscreen
Product Type
Professional RF and EMS body-sculpting system
Technology
Radiofrequency and electromagnetic muscle stimulation
Treatment Handles
Four RF and EMS handles
Functions
Muscle stimulation, skin-firming support and body-contour refinement
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, flanks, arms, thighs, back and glutes
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Suggested Treatment Course
Approximately 6–12 sessions according to professional assessment
RF Energy
Adjustable
EMS Intensity
Customizable for different muscle groups and fitness levels
Control Interface
Intelligent digital touchscreen
Treatment Programs
Preset and adjustable professional protocols
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring and stimulation limits
Power Supply
110V–240V
Warranty
Three-year parts and labor warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$999.00
Professional Vibration Massage and Recovery System
Four Treatment Heads for Muscle Relaxation and Professional Wellness Programs
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine is a professional percussion and oscillation therapy system developed for spas, wellness centers, gyms, recovery studios and physiotherapy clinics.
Its adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range and customizable intensity settings allow trained operators to create different protocols for muscle relaxation, post-workout recovery, circulation support and general wellness.
Four treatment-head options allow the operator to select the size and treatment pattern that best match the target area and professional service.
Four treatment heads | 5Hz–100Hz adjustable frequency | Full-body applications | Three-year warranty
Four Treatment Heads on One Professional Platform Small Treatment Head
The small treatment head is designed for precise applications and smaller muscle areas. Its concentrated treatment pattern allows the operator to work accurately on localized areas requiring controlled vibration. Common treatment areas include: Forearms Hands Feet Calves Small shoulder areas Localized muscle groups Medium Treatment Head
The medium treatment head is designed for general massage and recovery treatments. It provides balanced coverage for common muscle groups and medium-sized treatment areas. Common treatment areas include: Arms Shoulders Neck muscles Lower legs Upper back General muscle groups Large Treatment Head
The large treatment head provides broader coverage for larger muscle areas. It is suitable for professional treatments requiring efficient vibration across wide treatment zones. Common treatment areas include: Back Thighs Gluteal muscles Hamstrings Quadriceps Larger body areas Flexible Treatment Head
The flexible treatment head is designed to adapt to body contours and areas requiring a more adaptable treatment surface. Common treatment applications include: Curved body areas General relaxation Broad muscle groups Body-contour massage Wellness treatments Customized full-body protocols The appropriate treatment head should be selected according to the target area, muscle condition, client comfort and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Head for Each Service
The system supports four treatment heads. The appropriate option should be selected according to the size of the treatment area, required intensity and intended wellness application. Option 1: Small Treatment Head
A precision-focused attachment for localized muscle groups and smaller treatment areas. Recommended applications: Localized muscle tension Hands and feet Calves and forearms Precision recovery treatments Recommended for: Targeted wellness protocols Smaller muscle areas Detailed massage services Localized vibration treatments Option 2: Medium Treatment Head
A versatile attachment for general massage, relaxation and recovery programs. Recommended applications: Arms and shoulders Upper-back treatments Lower-leg treatments General muscle relaxation Recommended for: Spa massage services Wellness programs General recovery treatments Regular maintenance sessions Option 3: Large Treatment Head
A broad-coverage attachment for larger muscle groups and body areas. Recommended applications: Back treatments Thigh and leg treatments Gluteal muscles Athletic recovery programs Recommended for: Gyms and recovery centers Sports-wellness businesses Full-body massage services High-volume professional treatments Option 4: Flexible Treatment Head
An adaptable attachment for curved body areas and customized wellness protocols. Recommended applications: Contoured body areas Broad relaxation treatments Flexible full-body protocols General massage services Recommended for: Professional spas Wellness centers Customized treatment programs Businesses offering varied massage services Adjustable Frequency for Customized Vibration Treatments
The G8 Vibration Massage Machine provides an adjustable frequency range from 5Hz to 100Hz. Each frequency and intensity setting should be selected according to the treatment area, client comfort and professional objective. The adjustable settings give trained operators greater control over treatment intensity and client comfort. New clients should begin with a lower frequency and intensity before either setting is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Different treatment heads and frequency settings support different professional applications. Upper-Body Treatments
Back Shoulders Arms Forearms Suitable neck muscles Upper-body recovery programs Lower-Body Treatments
Thighs Hamstrings Quadriceps Calves Gluteal muscles Feet Full-Body Wellness Treatments
General muscle relaxation Post-workout recovery Circulation support Fatigue-relief programs Stress-reduction services Maintenance-oriented wellness sessions Professional Recovery and Wellness Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected treatment head, frequency, intensity and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected responses vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every professional treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, target muscle groups, comfort level and treatment goals. The appropriate treatment head, frequency and intensity are then selected. 2. System Preparation
The selected treatment head is installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the attachment is secure before beginning the session. 3. Parameter Selection
Frequency, intensity, session duration and treatment pattern are selected according to the target area and professional protocol. 4. Treatment Application
The operator applies the treatment head to the selected muscle groups using light to moderate pressure and controlled movement. A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the client receives suitable hydration, recovery and aftercare guidance. Some clients may return to their normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary tenderness, sensitivity, tingling or muscle fatigue may occur. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital controls with adjustable percussion and oscillation technology for streamlined use in professional settings. Key operating advantages include: Digital control display Adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range Customizable intensity settings Four treatment-head options Percussion and oscillation technology Full-body treatment capability Quiet operation below 70dB Lightweight and portable design Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment heads and the required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One G8 Vibration Massage Machine One small treatment head One medium treatment head One large treatment head One flexible treatment head Treatment-head connection components Power cable Rechargeable battery where included with the selected model English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine setup guidance Treatment-head installation instructions Frequency-selection guidance Intensity-adjustment guidance Treatment-protocol information Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Treatment-head installation Digital-control operation Frequency adjustment Intensity selection Treatment-area planning Client positioning Basic wellness and recovery protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine is supported by a three-year parts and labor warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital display and control system Original treatment heads Treatment-head connection components Original power components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-head operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of treatment heads and external components Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional vibration-massage equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active or suspected blood clots Severe cardiovascular conditions Acute inflammation or infection Open wounds in the treatment area Recent fractures Recent surgery Severe osteoporosis Bleeding disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Severe nerve impairment Reduced sensation Other contraindications listed in the operating manual The machine should not be applied directly over the front or side of the neck, eyes, head, spine, kidneys, open wounds, recent injuries or other prohibited areas. The selected frequency, intensity and pressure must remain comfortable throughout the session. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Professional spas Wellness centers Gyms and fitness facilities Sports-recovery centers Physiotherapy clinics Massage professionals Corporate wellness providers Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their recovery services This machine is not intended for unsupervised use by untrained individuals. Why Choose the G8 Vibration Massage Machine? Select the Appropriate Treatment Head
Four treatment-head options allow practitioners to select the appropriate coverage and treatment pattern for different muscle groups and body areas. Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports professional treatments for the back, shoulders, arms, legs, thighs, calves, feet and other suitable muscle groups. Customize Every Session
The adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range and customizable intensity settings allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The machine can support muscle-relaxation services, athletic-recovery programs, general wellness treatments and suitable add-on massage services. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts and labor warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is vibration massage therapy?
Vibration massage uses controlled percussion and oscillation movements to stimulate selected muscle groups. The frequency and intensity can be adjusted according to the treatment area and client comfort. What is the adjustable frequency range?
The G8 Vibration Massage Machine provides an adjustable frequency range from 5Hz to 100Hz. What is the difference between the four treatment heads?
The small head supports precise treatments, the medium head supports general massage, the large head provides broad coverage, and the flexible head adapts to curved body areas. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable treatment areas include the back, shoulders, arms, forearms, thighs, legs, calves, gluteal muscles, hands and feet. How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes. Treatment time varies according to the target area, frequency, intensity and professional protocol. Is vibration massage uncomfortable?
The frequency and intensity are adjustable. Clients should feel controlled vibration and muscle stimulation without pain. The operator should reduce the settings or stop treatment if discomfort occurs. Can the machine support athletic recovery programs?
Yes. The G8 Machine can be incorporated into professionally planned pre-workout activation, post-workout relaxation and general sports-recovery programs. Can it be offered as an add-on service?
Yes. Short vibration-massage sessions may be added to suitable massage, body-care, fitness and wellness services. Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts and labor warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Professional Vibration Massage to Your Business
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine combines: Four professional treatment heads Adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency Percussion and oscillation technology Full-body recovery and wellness applications Three-year warranty and lifetime support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment heads, frequency settings and professional training. Order Your G8 Vibration Massage Machine and Request a Quote Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Frequency Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Frequency
Gentle relaxation and comfort-focused treatments
Moderate Frequency
General muscle massage and wellness programs
Higher Frequency
Muscle stimulation and recovery-oriented treatments
Customized Frequency
Professional protocols for specific muscle groups
Treatment Area
Applicable Treatment Head
Intended Wellness Application
Back
Large or flexible head
Broad muscle relaxation
Shoulders
Small or medium head
Localized tension support
Arms and forearms
Small or medium head
General massage and recovery
Thighs and legs
Medium or large head
Post-workout recovery
Calves
Small or medium head
Tired-muscle relaxation
Gluteal muscles
Large or flexible head
Broad recovery treatment
Hands and feet
Small head
Targeted relaxation
Full body
Multiple heads
Customized wellness program
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine
Product Type
Professional vibration massage and recovery system
Technology
Percussion and oscillation vibration therapy
Frequency Range
5Hz–100Hz adjustable
Power Output
50W–150W
Treatment Heads
Small, medium, large and flexible
Session Duration
Approximately 15–20 minutes
Treatment Areas
Back, legs, arms, shoulders, neck muscles, feet and other suitable muscle groups
Control Interface
Digital frequency and intensity controls
Noise Level
Less than 70dB
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature control, intensity limits and overload protection
Power Supply
110V–240V
Portability
Lightweight design with cordless option available
Warranty
Three-year parts and labor warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,999.00
Professional Pelvic Floor Strengthening System
Non-Invasive HIFEM Technology for Pelvic Wellness and Bladder-Control Programs
The Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is a professional HIFEM system developed for pelvic floor strengthening, postpartum wellness, bladder-control support, and intimate wellness programs.
High-intensity focused electromagnetic energy stimulates deep pelvic floor muscles and produces approximately 12,000 muscle contractions during a 28–30-minute session. Clients remain comfortably seated and fully clothed throughout the treatment.
With adjustable power, customizable frequency settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and pre-programmed protocols, the system enables professionals to personalize every session according to the client’s comfort level and treatment objectives.
12,000 contractions per session | 28–30-minute treatment | Fully clothed | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Advanced HIFEM Technology on One Professional Platform High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
The system generates focused electromagnetic energy that penetrates the pelvic floor area and stimulates powerful involuntary muscle contractions. These contractions engage muscles more intensively and consistently than conventional voluntary exercises. Common applications include: Pelvic floor muscle strengthening Bladder-control support Postpartum wellness programs Intimate wellness treatments Core stability support Age-related pelvic muscle conditioning Supramaximal Muscle Contractions
Each session produces approximately 12,000 supramaximal contractions. The client does not need to perform manual exercises, allowing the system to provide consistent muscle activation throughout the treatment. Common benefits include: Consistent pelvic muscle engagement Improved muscle strength and endurance Convenient treatment without manual exercise Personalized intensity according to client comfort Structured treatment programs with repeatable settings Fully Clothed, Non-Invasive Treatment
Clients remain seated and fully clothed during the entire session. No applicators are inserted into the body, and the procedure requires no injections, incisions, anesthesia, or complicated preparation. This discreet treatment experience is suitable for professional environments where client privacy, comfort, and convenience are essential. Select the Right Program for Each Client Postpartum Wellness Program
Designed to support pelvic floor conditioning following pregnancy and childbirth, subject to professional assessment and appropriate medical clearance. Recommended applications: Postpartum pelvic muscle weakness Reduced pelvic floor tone Bladder leakage concerns Core stability support Recommended for: Postpartum clients Women seeking non-invasive pelvic wellness support Clients who find manual pelvic floor exercises difficult Bladder-Control Support Program
Provides targeted pelvic floor muscle stimulation for clients experiencing weakness associated with bladder-control concerns. Recommended applications: Stress-related urinary leakage Leakage during coughing or sneezing Leakage during physical activity Reduced bladder-support muscle strength Recommended for: Women and men with pelvic floor weakness Mature clients Clients seeking a non-surgical support program Intimate Wellness Program
Focuses on improving pelvic muscle tone, awareness, endurance, and control as part of a professional intimate wellness service. Recommended applications: Reduced pelvic muscle tone Pelvic floor conditioning Intimate wellness support Confidence and body-awareness programs Recommended for: Women’s wellness centers Intimate wellness clinics Clients seeking discreet, non-invasive treatment Pelvic Strength and Maintenance Program
Created for clients who want ongoing pelvic floor conditioning after completing an initial treatment course. Recommended applications: Pelvic muscle maintenance Core foundation support Age-related muscle conditioning Long-term wellness programs Recommended for: Existing pelvic floor clients Mature women and men Clients completing a structured treatment course Customizable Power and Frequency Settings The system allows professionals to adjust treatment intensity according to the client’s needs, tolerance, and program objectives. Treatment settings and session frequency should always be selected following professional consultation and client screening. Professional Pelvic Wellness Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, pelvic wellness concerns, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Determine whether professional or medical clearance is required. Step 2: Comfortable Positioning
The client sits comfortably in the treatment chair while remaining fully clothed. Correct seating alignment helps position the pelvic floor area over the electromagnetic treatment zone. Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the appropriate program, power level, frequency, and treatment duration. Begin at a comfortable intensity and adjust progressively according to the client’s response. Step 4: HIFEM Treatment
The system generates repeated electromagnetic pulses for approximately 28–30 minutes. The client experiences strong, rhythmic pelvic muscle contractions while remaining comfortably seated. Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program automatically. The client can leave the treatment area immediately unless the practitioner provides individual aftercare recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair combines professional performance with a discreet, comfortable client experience. Key advantages include: Approximately 12,000 contractions per session Fully clothed and non-invasive treatment Adjustable 300W–5000W power output Customizable 3–200Hz frequency range Intelligent digital touchscreen Pre-programmed treatment protocols Automatic shut-off and intensity controls Multiple professional color options Universal 110V–240V power compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing technical support Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair 1 × Integrated intelligent touchscreen control system Pre-programmed treatment protocols Adjustable power and frequency controls 1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable Selected professional chair color Documentation and Training
English user manual Operating and safety guid Standard treatment protocol templates Postpartum wellness protocol guidance Bladder-control support protocol guidance Intimate wellness protocol guidance Client consultation and education materials Service-menu and treatment-package guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair includes professional operating guidance to help your team use the system confidently and responsibly. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen and program operation Client consultation and screening Correct client positioning Power and frequency adjustment Treatment protocol selection Safety procedures and contraindications Machine cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Service planning and client communication Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and share photographs or video when required. A technician will assess the machine remotely. Operating guidance or replacement parts will be arranged when applicable. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before treatment. This system must be operated according to the supplied manual and applicable local requirements. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Active infection or inflammation Recent surgery in the treatment area Unexplained pelvic pain or bleeding Epilepsy or conditions affected by electromagnetic stimulation Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning a pelvic floor treatment program. Intended Professional Users
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Women’s wellness centers Gynecology and pelvic wellness practices Medical spas Physiotherapy and rehabilitation centers Postpartum wellness centers Intimate wellness clinics Professional beauty and wellness facilities Local licensing and operating requirements should be reviewed before offering treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair?
Approximately 12,000 Contractions per Session
Advanced HIFEM technology provides intensive pelvic floor muscle stimulation during a convenient 28–30-minute session. Discreet Client Experience
Clients remain fully clothed and comfortably seated, creating a private and convenient treatment experience without invasive applicators. Personalized Professional Programs
Adjustable power, frequency, and protocol settings allow practitioners to tailor sessions according to client comfort and treatment objectives. Multiple Wellness Applications
One system supports postpartum wellness, bladder-control programs, intimate wellness, core conditioning, and pelvic floor maintenance services. Complete Professional Support
The package includes training, operating documentation, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair?
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is a professional HIFEM system that uses focused electromagnetic energy to stimulate repeated pelvic floor muscle contractions while the client remains comfortably seated. How long does one session take?
A standard session takes approximately 28–30 minutes, depending on the selected protocol and the client’s individual treatment plan. Does the client remain fully clothed?
Yes. Clients can remain fully clothed throughout the session. Lightweight clothing that does not contain metal is generally the most appropriate. How many contractions occur during one session?
The system is designed to generate approximately 12,000 pelvic floor muscle contractions during a complete session. Is the treatment invasive?
No. The treatment does not require surgery, injections, internal applicators, or anesthesia. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients typically experience strong, rhythmic pelvic muscle contractions. Intensity can be adjusted progressively to maintain an appropriate comfort level. How many sessions are recommended?
The source protocol recommends two sessions per week over an 8–12-week program. The final schedule should be personalized following professional consultation. When may clients notice changes?
Individual experiences vary. Some clients may notice increased pelvic muscle awareness during the early stages of a program, while strength and functional changes generally require a consistent series of sessions. Can the chair be used for postpartum clients?
It can be incorporated into postpartum wellness programs after an appropriate professional assessment and medical clearance when necessary. Is the system suitable for men?
The technology may also support pelvic floor conditioning programs for suitable male clients, subject to professional screening and an appropriate treatment plan. Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. The power output and frequency can be adjusted according to the selected protocol, treatment objective, and client comfort. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Operating guidance, safety training, treatment protocol instruction, and ongoing technical support are included. Add Professional Pelvic Wellness to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair enables clinics and wellness centers to introduce a discreet, non-invasive pelvic floor service supported by advanced HIFEM technology. Five key benefits: Approximately 12,000 contractions in a 28–30-minute session Fully clothed and non-invasive client experience Adjustable power, frequency, and treatment protocols Multiple pelvic wellness applications on one platform CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Setting
Available Range
Professional Purpose
Power Output
300W–5000W
Adjustable treatment intensity
Frequency Range
3–200Hz
Customizable muscle-stimulation patterns
Session Duration
28–30 minutes
Efficient professional treatment
Treatment Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Structured pelvic wellness programs
Treatment Position
Seated and fully clothed
Discreet, convenient client experience
Control System
Intelligent touchscreen
Protocol and intensity management
Treatment Category
Primary Objective
Suitable Clients
Postpartum Wellness
Support pelvic floor muscle recovery and conditioning
Postpartum clients with appropriate clearance
Bladder-Control Support
Strengthen muscles associated with bladder support
Women and men with pelvic floor weakness
Intimate Wellness
Improve pelvic muscle tone, control, and awareness
Adult wellness clients
Menopause Support
Support pelvic muscle conditioning during age-related changes
Menopausal and postmenopausal clients
Core Stability
Strengthen the pelvic foundation supporting the core
Clients seeking posture and stability support
Maintenance Programs
Help maintain pelvic muscle strength after a treatment course
Returning wellness clients
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair
Technology
HIFEM High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
Primary Application
Pelvic floor strengthening and intimate wellness
Power Output
300W–5000W adjustable
Frequency Range
3–200Hz
Session Duration
Approximately 28–30 minutes
Contractions per Session
Approximately 12,000
Treatment Position
Seated and fully clothed
Control System
Intelligent digital touchscreen
Treatment Programs
Pre-programmed and customizable protocols
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature control, and intensity limits
Available Colors
Orange, pink, blue, and white
Power Supply
110V–240V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Training and ongoing technical assistance
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$1,099.00
Professional 5D 80K RF Cavitation and Vacuum System Multi-Function Technology for Body Contouring, Skin Tightening, and Facial Rejuvenation The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine is a professional beauty system developed for body contouring, skin tightening, facial rejuvenation, vacuum massage, and cellulite-appearance treatments. The system combines 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar radiofrequency, and adjustable vacuum therapy. Its three specialized treatment handles support customized treatments for the face, neck, waist, abdomen, back, arms, and thighs. With an intelligent touchscreen, pre-programmed protocols, air-and-water circulation cooling, universal 110V–240V compatibility, and three different handle sizes, the system is suitable for beauty salons, spas, body-contouring clinics, and professional wellness facilities. 80K cavitation | 5D radiofrequency | Vacuum therapy | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Technologies on One Platform 80K Ultrasonic Cavitation
The 80K cavitation function operates at 80,000Hz and delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable body areas as part of a professional contouring program. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Waistline treatments Thigh contouring Upper-arm treatments Buttock-area programs Localized body-shaping treatments 5D Multipolar Radiofrequency
Multipolar RF energy provides controlled thermal stimulation within the selected treatment area. The three handle sizes support facial and body applications. Common applications include: Facial skin tightening Fine-line and wrinkle care Neck rejuvenation Body skin-firming programs Collagen-remodeling support Post-cavitation tightening treatments Adjustable Vacuum Therapy
The vacuum function provides controlled suction and massage through the selected RF handle. Common applications include: Vacuum massage Tissue mobilization Cellulite-appearance programs Body-contouring support Lymphatic-style beauty treatments Muscle-comfort massage Select the Right Program for Each Client Body-Contouring Program
Combines suitable cavitation, RF, and vacuum settings for targeted body areas. Recommended applications: Abdomen contouring Waistline shaping Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs Buttock-area contouring Recommended for: Clients concerned about localized body areas Clients seeking non-invasive body contouring Clients combining treatments with healthy lifestyle habits Skin-Tightening Program
Uses multipolar RF energy and suitable vacuum settings to support controlled thermal treatments. Recommended applications: Loose-looking body skin Reduced facial firmness Upper-arm skin tightening Abdomen and waist firming General collagen-remodeling programs Recommended for: Clients seeking firmer-looking skin Clients combining cavitation and RF Clients receiving professional age-management treatments Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses the small vacuum and RF handle for controlled treatments across suitable facial and neck areas. Recommended applications: Facial skin tightening Fine-line care Wrinkle-appearance treatments Neck rejuvenation General facial firming Recommended for: Clients concerned about early signs of aging Clients seeking non-invasive facial care Clients requiring a smaller treatment applicator Vacuum-Massage Program
Uses adjustable suction and controlled massage movements on suitable body areas. Recommended applications: Body massage Tissue mobilization Cellulite-appearance programs Lymphatic-style beauty treatments Combined body-contouring services Recommended for: Clients receiving multi-stage body treatments Clients seeking massage-based body care Clients combining vacuum with RF or cavitation Adjustable Cavitation, RF, and Vacuum Settings
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the selected area, client comfort, and professional protocol. Settings should be adjusted progressively according to client comfort, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Face and Neck
The small vacuum and RF handle supports controlled treatments for smaller and more delicate areas. Common treatment objectives include: Facial skin tightening Fine-line care Neck rejuvenation Improved-looking firmness Facial massage Waist and Ribs
The medium vacuum and RF handle supports contouring and massage across medium-sized body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Waistline contouring Side-body treatments Vacuum massage Skin-firming support General body shaping Abdomen, Back, Arms, and Thighs
The large vacuum and RF handle supports treatments across larger body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Abdomen contouring Back treatments Upper-arm contouring Thigh programs Cellulite-appearance care Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment objectives, target areas, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Technology and Handle Selection
Choose the appropriate cavitation, RF, vacuum, or combined treatment sequence. Select the small, medium, or large handle according to the treatment area. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the selected area and apply the appropriate conductive treatment medium. Configure the machine according to the selected technology, treatment area, and client comfort. Step 4: Active Treatment
Move the treatment handle continuously according to the supplied protocol. Monitor the skin response, temperature, suction level, and client comfort throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the treatment medium, inspect and clean the treated area, document the selected settings, and provide appropriate hydration, skincare, or lifestyle recommendations. Designed for Professional Beauty Environments The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine combines three complementary treatment technologies with specialized facial and body handles. Key advantages include: 80K ultrasonic cavitation 5D multipolar radiofrequency Adjustable vacuum therapy Three specialized treatment handles Small handle for the face and neck Medium handle for the waist and ribs Large handle for the abdomen, back, arms, and thighs Facial and body treatment capability Intelligent touchscreen controls Pre-programmed treatment protocols Air-and-water circulation cooling Approximately 20–40-minute treatments per area Universal 110V–240V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation main unit 1 × Small vacuum and RF handle 1 × Medium vacuum and RF handle 1 × Large vacuum and RF handle Integrated 80K cavitation function Integrated 5D RF function Integrated adjustable vacuum function Intelligent touchscreen control system Pre-programmed treatment protocols Conductive gel starter supply 1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions 80K cavitation guidance RF handle-selection guidance Vacuum-pressure guidance Facial treatment protocols Body-contouring protocols Combined treatment protocols Client-consultation materials Cleaning and maintenance guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use all three technologies safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening 80K cavitation operation Treatment-handle selection RF setting adjustment Vacuum-pressure adjustment Facial treatment protocols Waist and body protocols Combined treatment sequences Client monitoring Post-treatment guidance Cooling-system maintenance Equipment cleaning Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Conductive gel, handle seals, tubing, filters, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Active cancer or tumors Active infection or inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Serious liver or kidney conditions Blood-clotting disorders Reduced or impaired skin sensation Recent surgery within the treatment area Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Cavitation should not be applied over the heart, head, neck, breasts, bones, joints, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Facial treatments should only use the suitable small facial handle and professionally selected settings. The cavitation function should not be used on the face. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, handles, cables, tubing, and accessories before use. Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation. Select the correct handle for the treatment area. Begin with conservative RF and vacuum settings. Keep active cavitation and RF handles moving during treatment. Use the correct conductive medium. Monitor skin response, temperature, suction, and client comfort. Avoid prohibited anatomical areas. Do not leave an active handle stationary on the skin. Record the treatment area and selected settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Beauty salons Medical spas Body-contouring clinics Wellness centers Skin-rejuvenation studios Professional spas Aesthetic treatment facilities Home-based beauty businesses Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine? Three Complementary Technologies
The system combines 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar radiofrequency, and adjustable vacuum therapy. Three Specialized Treatment Handles
Small, medium, and large handles support customized treatments for facial, waist, and body areas. Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports facial rejuvenation, skin tightening, body contouring, vacuum massage, and cellulite-appearance programs. Professional Cooling and Controls
The intelligent touchscreen and air-and-water circulation cooling support efficient professional operation. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine?
It is a professional beauty system combining 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar radiofrequency, and adjustable vacuum therapy. What does 80K cavitation mean?
The cavitation function operates at an ultrasonic frequency of 80,000Hz and is intended for professional body-contouring programs. Is 80K automatically better than 30K or 40K?
Different cavitation frequencies have different operating characteristics and treatment protocols. A higher frequency should not automatically be presented as deeper or more effective. Selection should follow the product design and professional training. How many treatment handles are included?
The machine includes three handles: small for the face and neck, medium for the waist and ribs, and large for broader body areas. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, waist, ribs, abdomen, back, upper arms, thighs, and buttocks. How long does one treatment take?
A typical treatment takes approximately 20–40 minutes per area, depending on the selected technology and protocol. Can cavitation, RF, and vacuum be combined?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive these functions as part of a structured treatment sequence. The order and settings should follow professional training. Can the machine be used for facial treatments?
Yes. The small vacuum and RF handle supports suitable facial and neck treatments. The cavitation function should not be used on the face. What does treatment feel like?
RF creates controlled warmth, vacuum produces suction and massage, and cavitation may produce an audible sensation. Settings should remain within a comfortable, professionally monitored range. Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities following a suitable treatment. Temporary warmth, redness, sensitivity, or vacuum marks may occur. Are results guaranteed?
Outcomes vary according to the treatment area, body composition, skin condition, number of sessions, selected settings, lifestyle, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers 80K cavitation, RF, vacuum therapy, handle selection, treatment protocols, client screening, cooling-system maintenance, cleaning, and troubleshooting. Add Professional 5D 80K Body and Facial Treatments to Your Business The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine enables salons, spas, and beauty clinics to provide customizable body-contouring, facial-rejuvenation, skin-tightening, and vacuum-massage treatments. Five key benefits: 80K ultrasonic cavitation for professional body programs 5D multipolar RF with adjustable vacuum therapy Three specialized handles for the face, waist, and body Intelligent touchscreen controls with air-and-water cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Cavitation Frequency
80,000Hz
Ultrasonic body-contouring treatments
RF Technology
5D multipolar RF
Controlled facial and body heating
Vacuum Pressure
Adjustable
Personalized suction and massage
Treatment Handles
Three sizes
Face, waist, and larger body areas
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes per area
Flexible treatment planning
Control System
Intelligent touchscreen
Protocol and setting management
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports continuous operation
Power Supply
110V–240V
International compatibility
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Handle or Technology
Face
Skin tightening and wrinkle-appearance care
Small vacuum and RF handle
Neck
Rejuvenation and skin-firming support
Small vacuum and RF handle
Waist and Ribs
Contouring and vacuum massage
Medium vacuum and RF handle
Abdomen
Body contouring and skin tightening
Cavitation and large RF/vacuum handle
Back
Body treatment and massage
Large vacuum and RF handle
Upper Arms
Contouring and skin firming
Cavitation and large RF/vacuum handle
Thighs
Contouring and cellulite-appearance care
Cavitation, RF, and vacuum
Buttocks
Contouring and skin-firming support
Large vacuum and RF handle
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine
Technology
80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar RF, and vacuum therapy
Cavitation Frequency
80,000Hz
RF Technology
5D multipolar radiofrequency
Vacuum Pressure
Adjustable
Treatment Handles
Three
Small Handle
Vacuum and RF for the face and neck
Medium Handle
Vacuum and RF for the waist and ribs
Large Handle
Vacuum and RF for the abdomen, back, arms, and thighs
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes per area
Display
Intelligent touchscreen
Treatment Programs
Pre-programmed and adjustable
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, ribs, waist, abdomen, back, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Power Supply
110V–240V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,599.00
Professional 7D HIFU Facial and Body Treatment System
Eight-Cartridge Focused Ultrasound Technology for Facial Lifting and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine is a professional aesthetic system developed for facial lifting, wrinkle care, skin tightening, collagen stimulation, and body-contouring treatments.
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound technology delivers concentrated ultrasound energy at selected tissue depths. Eight cartridges covering depths from 1.5mm to 16mm support customized treatments for superficial facial areas, deeper facial structures, and suitable body areas.
With adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, facial and body treatment capability, and dual-voltage compatibility, the system is suitable for aesthetic clinics, beauty salons, slimming centers, and professional skincare facilities.
7D HIFU technology | Eight cartridges | 1.5–16mm treatment depths | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at selected depths without requiring incisions or injectable products. Common applications include: Facial skin tightening Fine-line and wrinkle care Jawline contouring Neck and décolletage treatments Body skin-firming programs Professional body-contouring treatments Facial Lifting and Collagen Stimulation
The 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm cartridges are designed for treatments across different facial tissue depths. Common applications include: Reduced facial firmness Fine lines and wrinkles Lower-face laxity Jawline definition Double-chin-area treatment Neck skin tightening Body Contouring and Skin Firming
The 6mm, 8mm, 10mm, 13mm, and 16mm cartridges support professional treatments for suitable body areas. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Upper-arm treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin tightening Cellulite-appearance improvement Select the Right Program for Each Client Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses suitable facial cartridges and customized energy settings for general facial lifting and skin-rejuvenation treatments. Recommended applications: Fine lines and wrinkles Reduced facial firmness Uneven-looking skin texture Early signs of aging General collagen-stimulation programs Recommended for: Clients seeking non-invasive facial rejuvenation Clients concerned about visible signs of aging Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement Facial-Lifting and Jawline Program
Uses suitable middle and deeper facial treatment depths to support lower-face tightening and contour definition. Recommended applications: Lower-face laxity Reduced jawline definition Jowl-area treatments Double-chin concerns Neck skin tightening Recommended for: Clients seeking a firmer-looking lower face Clients concerned about facial contours Clients interested in non-surgical lifting programs Body-Contouring Program
Uses deeper body cartridges for suitable body areas requiring contouring and skin-firming treatments. Recommended applications: Abdomen contouring Upper-arm treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin tightening Recommended for: Clients concerned about localized body areas Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial HIFU program. Recommended applications: Facial-lifting maintenance Skin-firming maintenance Body-contour maintenance Continued collagen-stimulation programs Recommended for: Returning HIFU clients Clients completing an initial treatment plan Clients seeking periodic professional maintenance Adjustable Treatment Depths and Energy Settings
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine provides eight cartridge depths for different facial and body applications. Energy settings should be selected according to the cartridge, treatment area, tissue condition, client comfort, and professional protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Face, Chin, and Jawline
The three facial cartridges support customized treatments across suitable facial areas. Common treatment objectives include: Facial lifting Fine-line care Wrinkle reduction Jawline definition Double-chin-area treatment Neck and Décolletage
Suitable facial depths and controlled energy settings can support professional tightening and rejuvenation programs. Common treatment objectives include: Neck skin tightening Reduced appearance of neck lines Improved-looking firmness Décolletage rejuvenation Collagen-stimulation support Arms, Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
The deeper cartridge configurations support selected body-contouring and skin-firming treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Abdomen treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin firming Professional Treatment Applications
How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures, target areas, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Cartridge Selection
Select the appropriate facial or body cartridge according to the treatment area, target depth, tissue condition, and professional protocol. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the treatment area and apply suitable ultrasound gel. Configure the energy level and treatment parameters according to the selected cartridge and client tolerance. Step 4: HIFU Treatment
Position the handpiece correctly and deliver focused ultrasound energy according to the mapped treatment plan. Monitor client comfort and tissue response throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the ultrasound gel, inspect and clean the treated area, record the cartridge and settings used, and provide appropriate post-treatment skincare guidance. Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine combines multi-depth facial and body treatment capability with straightforward professional operation. Key advantages include: Professional 7D HIFU technology Eight treatment cartridges Treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm Three facial cartridges Five body cartridges Facial and body treatment capability Adjustable energy settings Intelligent touchscreen controls Approximately 30–60-minute sessions Facial lifting and wrinkle-care programs Jawline and neck treatments Body-contouring and skin-firming programs 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications Results timelines and duration are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty 7D HIFU main unit 1 × Professional HIFU treatment handpiece 1 × 1.5mm cartridge 1 × 3.0mm cartridge 1 × 4.5mm cartridge 1 × 6.0mm cartridge 1 × 8.0mm cartridge 1 × 10.0mm cartridge 1 × 13.0mm cartridge 1 × 16.0mm cartridge Intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Cartridge-selection guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Facial treatment protocols Jawline and neck protocols Body-contouring protocols Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Facial and body assessment Treatment-area mapping Cartridge selection Energy-level adjustment Handpiece positioning Facial-lifting protocols Jawline and neck protocols Body-contouring protocols Post-treatment care Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Cartridges and other components subject to normal use or shot limitations are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable cartridges, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation, health-history review, and skin assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Active skin infection Open wounds or severe inflammation Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Keloid tendency or significant scarring Severe vascular conditions Poor wound healing Severe or recent sunburn Recent surgery within the treatment area Recent injectable or aggressive skin treatments Reduced or impaired skin sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients who have recently received fillers, botulinum toxin, chemical peels, or other professional aesthetic procedures should be assessed before treatment. HIFU should not be applied over the eyes, thyroid gland, major nerves, bones, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cartridges, cables, and accessories before use. Confirm the cartridge and treatment depth before beginning. Map the treatment area carefully. Apply sufficient ultrasound gel. Begin with conservative energy settings. Monitor client comfort and tissue response. Do not deliver energy over prohibited anatomical areas. Do not repeatedly treat the same point outside the protocol. Record the cartridge, depth, energy, and treatment area. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Aesthetic clinics Beauty salons Medical spas Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring clinics Professional spas Slimming centers Wellness facilities Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIFU treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine? Eight Multi-Depth Cartridges
Eight cartridges covering depths from 1.5mm to 16mm support customized facial and body treatments. Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports treatments for the face, neck, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks. Adjustable Professional Settings
Interchangeable cartridges and adjustable energy controls allow professionals to customize treatments according to the target area and client. Intelligent Touchscreen Operation
The touchscreen interface supports cartridge selection, parameter adjustment, and professional treatment management. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, cartridge guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine?
It is a professional High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound system developed for facial lifting, skin tightening, wrinkle care, collagen stimulation, and selected body-contouring treatments. What does 7D HIFU mean?
The product uses a multi-depth HIFU cartridge system designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at different facial and body treatment depths. How many cartridges are included?
The package includes eight cartridges covering treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm. Which cartridges are used for facial treatments?
The 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm cartridges are supplied for professional facial and neck treatment protocols. Which cartridges are used for body treatments?
The 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm cartridges are supplied for suitable body treatment areas. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, jawline, upper arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks. How long does one treatment take?
A standard professional treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the treatment area, cartridge, and selected protocol. How many treatments are recommended?
One to three sessions per year. The final treatment schedule should be personalized according to the client’s condition and objectives. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice an initial tightening effect after one session, with progressive changes continuing over two to three months. How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of 12–18 months. Actual longevity varies according to age, skin condition, treatment settings, lifestyle, and individual response. Is there downtime?
Many clients can continue normal daily activities after a suitable treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, or sensitivity may occur. What does HIFU treatment feel like?
Clients may experience warmth, tingling, pressure, or brief sensitivity as focused ultrasound energy is delivered. Can the machine be used for body treatments?
Yes. The deeper cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the upper arms, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas. Are results guaranteed?
Results vary according to age, tissue condition, treatment area, cartridge selection, energy settings, lifestyle, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment mapping, cartridge selection, energy adjustment, facial and body protocols, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Professional 7D HIFU Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine enables aesthetic clinics, beauty salons, and wellness professionals to provide customizable facial-lifting, skin-tightening, wrinkle-care, and body-contouring services. Five key benefits: Eight professional cartridges from 1.5mm to 16mm Facial and body treatment capability Adjustable energy settings for customized protocols Intelligent touchscreen with cartridge selection CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, cartridge details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment Depth
General Treatment Level
Possible Applications
1.5mm
Superficial facial tissue
Fine lines, texture, and delicate facial areas
3.0mm
Dermal facial layer
Collagen stimulation and skin tightening
4.5mm
Deeper facial layer
Facial lifting, jawline, and lower-face treatments
6.0mm
Shallow body treatment
Arms and smaller body areas
8.0mm
Medium body treatment
Abdomen, waist, and thigh programs
10.0mm
Deeper body treatment
Body contouring and suitable buttock areas
13.0mm
Deep body treatment
Larger body areas and thicker tissue
16.0mm
Maximum listed body depth
Professional deep body-contouring protocols
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Depth Category
Face
Lifting, tightening, and wrinkle care
1.5mm, 3.0mm, or 4.5mm
Chin and Jawline
Contour definition and lower-face tightening
Suitable facial depth
Neck
Skin tightening and line care
Suitable facial depth
Décolletage
Texture and firmness improvement
Professionally selected facial depth
Upper Arms
Skin firming and contouring
Suitable body depth
Abdomen
Body contouring and tightening
Suitable deeper body depth
Thighs
Contouring and cellulite-appearance care
Suitable body depth
Buttocks
Skin-firming and contouring support
Suitable body depth
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine
Technology
7D High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound
Treatment Cartridges
Eight
Treatment Depths
1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm
Facial Cartridges
1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm
Body Cartridges
6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm
Primary Functions
Skin tightening, facial lifting, wrinkle care, and body contouring
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes
Treatment Frequency
Personalized according to client assessment
Supplied Results Timeline
Initial changes may be visible after one session, with progressive improvement over two to three months
Supplied Results Duration
Approximately 12–18 months
Energy Output
Adjustable
Display
Intelligent touchscreen with cartridge selection
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$999.00
Professional RF Microneedling Device
Controlled-Depth Skin Rejuvenation, Collagen Remodeling, and Tightening System
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device is a professional skin-rejuvenation system combining controlled-depth microneedling with radiofrequency energy.
Adjustable microneedles penetrate the skin at depths from 0.5mm to 4.0mm while delivering controlled RF energy into the targeted tissue. This dual action supports the skin’s natural renewal response and stimulates collagen and elastin remodeling.
With four interchangeable cartridge options, adjustable RF intensity, intelligent touchscreen controls, and both facial and body applications, the system is designed for dermatology practices, medical spas, and advanced aesthetic clinics operating within local professional requirements.
Microneedling and RF | 0.5–4.0mm Adjustable Depth | Four Cartridge Options | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform Controlled-Depth Microneedling
The device creates controlled microchannels at carefully selected depths. This process supports the skin’s natural repair response and encourages collagen and elastin production. Common applications include: Fine-line and wrinkle treatments Acne-scar improvement Surgical-scar treatments Stretch-mark improvement Enlarged-pore care Skin-texture refinement Radiofrequency Dermal Heating
RF energy is delivered through the microneedles into the selected tissue depth. This controlled thermal action supports deeper collagen remodeling while limiting unnecessary surface exposure. Common applications include: Skin-tightening treatments Collagen-remodeling programs Firmness and elasticity support Facial and neck rejuvenation Texture improvement Body skin-firming treatments Interchangeable Cartridge Technology
Four cartridge configurations allow professionals to adapt treatments to delicate facial zones, complete facial areas, the neck and décolleté, or larger body regions. Common applications include: Precision under-eye treatments Full-face rejuvenation Face and neck protocols Décolleté treatments Abdominal stretch-mark care Thigh and arm rejuvenation Select the Right Program for Each Client Anti-Aging and Skin-Tightening Program
A professional facial-rejuvenation protocol designed to address fine lines, wrinkles, reduced elasticity, and skin laxity. Recommended applications: Face, jawline, neck, and décolleté. Recommended for: Suitable clients seeking improved firmness, smoother-looking skin, and progressive collagen remodeling. Scar and Texture-Refinement Program
A customized microneedling and RF protocol developed to improve the appearance of acne scars, selected surgical scars, and uneven texture. Recommended applications: Face and compatible body areas containing fully healed scars. Recommended for: Clients seeking gradual improvement in scar appearance, texture, and overall skin smoothness. Stretch-Mark and Body-Rejuvenation Program
A larger-area protocol using the appropriate cartridge and needle depth for body skin concerns. Recommended applications: Abdomen, thighs, and upper arms. Recommended for: Clients seeking improvement in the appearance of stretch marks, uneven body texture, or reduced skin firmness. Maintenance and Collagen-Support Program
A follow-up treatment designed to support previously achieved rejuvenation results and continued collagen stimulation. Recommended applications: Previously treated facial or body areas. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and require periodic maintenance based on professional assessment. Adjustable Needle Depth and RF Treatment Settings
Needle depth and RF intensity must be selected according to the client’s skin condition, treatment area, sensitivity, medical history, and applicable professional protocol. Deeper settings are not automatically better and should only be used when clinically appropriate. Adjustable Treatment Areas Facial Areas
The 10-pin and 25-pin cartridges support precision and full-face treatments across suitable facial zones. Treatment objectives include: Fine-line reduction Wrinkle improvement Acne-scar care Enlarged-pore refinement Skin-texture improvement Firmness and elasticity support More even-looking skin tone Neck and Décolleté Areas
The 25-pin or 36-pin cartridge can support carefully controlled treatments across suitable neck and upper-chest areas. Treatment objectives include: Neck-line improvement Skin-firming support Décolleté rejuvenation Texture refinement Collagen stimulation Improved elasticity Body Areas
The 36-pin and 49-pin cartridges provide wider coverage for compatible body-treatment zones. Treatment objectives include: Stretch-mark improvement Abdominal skin rejuvenation Thigh-texture refinement Upper-arm firming Selected scar treatments Smoother-looking body skin Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s skin concerns, medical history, medications, previous procedures, healing response, sun exposure, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Skin Assessment
Evaluate skin type, treatment area, concern severity, sensitivity, and suitability. Select the appropriate cartridge, needle depth, RF intensity, and treatment pattern. Step 3: Skin Preparation
Cleanse and disinfect the treatment area according to clinical protocol. Apply a suitable topical anesthetic when professionally indicated and permitted, then remove it completely before treatment. Step 4: Controlled RF Microneedling Treatment
Install a new sterile cartridge, confirm the selected settings, and perform the treatment using consistent passes and controlled coverage. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes. Step 5: Post-Treatment Care
Apply professionally appropriate post-treatment products and provide written aftercare instructions covering sun protection, cleansing, hydration, skincare restrictions, and expected temporary reactions. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device combines adjustable depth, controlled RF intensity, four cartridge options, and intelligent operation for professional skin-rejuvenation services. Key advantages include: Combined microneedling and RF technology Adjustable 0.5–4.0mm needle depth Adjustable radiofrequency intensity Four interchangeable cartridge configurations Precision facial and larger body applications Approximately 20–40-minute sessions Structured 3–6-session treatment courses Intelligent touchscreen operation 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Technical Specifications Treatment response, downtime, improvement timeline, and result duration vary according to skin condition, age, treatment depth, RF intensity, treatment course, healing response, lifestyle, sun exposure, and aftercare compliance. Results should not be presented as guaranteed. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device Compatible professional treatment handpiece Multiple interchangeable needle cartridges 10-pin cartridge configuration 25-pin cartridge configuration 36-pin cartridge configuration 49-pin cartridge configuration 1 × Compatible power cable Standard operating accessories 1 × Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guide Touchscreen operating instructions Cartridge-selection guidance Needle-depth guidance RF-setting guidance Treatment-protocol information Contraindication and safety instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Professional operator training Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help qualified users understand the machine’s setup, treatment settings, cartridge selection, and maintenance requirements. Training and support cover: Machine installation and initial setup Intelligent touchscreen operation Treatment-handpiece preparation Sterile cartridge installation Cartridge selection by treatment area Needle-depth adjustment RF-intensity selection Treatment-pattern guidance Client consultation and skin assessment Contraindication screening Infection-control procedures Post-treatment care Cleaning and routine maintenance Troubleshooting assistance Training supplied with the machine does not replace any professional license, medical supervision, infection-control qualification, or legal authorization required in the operator’s location. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising under normal professional operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before repair guidance or replacement parts are supplied. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting assistance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair instructions Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication during the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information. Provide a detailed description of the technical problem. Submit clear photographs or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the issue. Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect operation or treatment setup Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Liquid damage or unsuitable storage Failure to follow cleaning and maintenance instructions Use of incompatible cartridges or accessories Normal wear of handpieces, cables, and consumable components Used or disposable needle cartridges Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
RF microneedling is a professional procedure requiring appropriate training, infection-control practices, and compliance with local licensing or medical-supervision requirements. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Active skin infection Herpes outbreak Open wounds or sores Active inflammation in the treatment area Recent sunburn or excessive sun exposure Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Severe keloid-scarring tendency Blood-clotting or bleeding disorders Current anticoagulant treatment without medical clearance Autoimmune conditions affecting healing Uncontrolled diabetes Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Recent isotretinoin use Reduced skin sensation Poor wound-healing history Recent injectable or surgical treatment in the area Any condition requiring professional medical clearance A waiting period of approximately 6–12 months after isotretinoin use may be appropriate, but the client must follow the advice of their prescribing healthcare professional. Operating Precautions
Complete a detailed consultation and skin assessment. Confirm the operator is legally permitted to perform RF microneedling. Obtain informed consent before treatment. Document the client’s medical history and current medications. Examine the skin for infection, wounds, irritation, and recent sun exposure. Use a new, sterile, single-use needle cartridge for every client and session. Never reuse disposable needle cartridges. Clean and disinfect the handpiece and treatment environment properly. Select needle depth according to the treatment area and concern. Adjust RF intensity according to skin response and tolerance. Do not assume that deeper penetration produces better results. Monitor the skin continuously during treatment. Stop treatment if an unexpected reaction occurs. Avoid overlapping passes beyond the professional protocol. Follow appropriate sharps-disposal procedures. Provide complete written aftercare guidance. Maintain accurate treatment records. Follow all local infection-control and clinical-waste requirements. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device is intended for appropriately qualified users, which may include: Dermatology practices Medical spas Aesthetic medical clinics Licensed healthcare professionals Physicians Qualified nurses or nurse practitioners Properly trained aesthetic practitioners under required supervision Advanced beauty clinics where legally permitted Licensing, supervision, insurance, and scope-of-practice requirements vary by location. Buyers and operators are responsible for confirming all applicable local requirements before providing treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device? 1. Combined Microneedling and RF Technology
The system combines controlled micro-injury with targeted RF energy to support both surface renewal and deeper collagen remodeling. 2. Adjustable 0.5–4.0mm Needle Depth
Variable penetration enables qualified professionals to adapt treatments to different skin concerns, areas, and protocols. 3. Four Specialized Cartridge Options
The 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin configurations support precision facial work, full-face rejuvenation, extended areas, and body treatments. 4. Facial and Body Treatment Capability
One platform supports treatments for the face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and upper arms. 5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The device includes CE and ISO certificates, professional operating guidance, technical support, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does RF microneedling work?
The device inserts microneedles at a controlled depth while delivering RF energy into the targeted tissue. Microneedling supports the skin’s natural repair response, while RF heating promotes deeper collagen and elastin remodeling. Q: How is RF microneedling different from standard microneedling?
Standard microneedling creates controlled microchannels. RF microneedling adds thermal energy at the selected tissue depth, providing an additional collagen-remodeling and skin-firming action. Q: What needle depths are available?
The needle depth is adjustable from approximately 0.5mm to 4.0mm. Q: Is the same needle depth used for every treatment?
No. Depth must be selected according to the treatment area, skin thickness, concern, client sensitivity, and professional protocol. Q: Which cartridges are included?
The system includes 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin cartridge options. Q: What is the 10-pin cartridge used for?
The 10-pin cartridge supports precise treatment of small or delicate areas, including selected under-eye, nose, mouth, and small-scar applications. Q: What is the 25-pin cartridge used for?
The 25-pin cartridge is designed for standard full-face rejuvenation, wrinkle care, skin tightening, and general texture improvement. Q: What is the 36-pin cartridge used for?
The 36-pin cartridge provides wider coverage for the face, neck, décolleté, and other extended treatment zones. Q: What is the 49-pin cartridge used for?
The 49-pin cartridge supports larger body areas such as the abdomen, thighs, and upper arms, including stretch-mark treatments. Q: Which skin concerns can the machine address?
Professional applications include fine lines, wrinkles, acne scars, selected surgical scars, stretch marks, enlarged pores, reduced firmness, and uneven texture. Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible areas include the face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and upper arms. Q: How long does a session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, excluding consultation, cleansing, and topical-anesthetic time. Q: Is topical anesthetic required?
A topical anesthetic may be used when professionally appropriate and legally permitted. The operator must follow the product instructions and local requirements. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Client experience varies. With suitable preparation and correctly selected settings, most clients describe temporary pressure, warmth, or prickling rather than severe pain. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A typical starting course includes approximately 3–6 sessions. Q: How far apart should treatments be scheduled?
Sessions are commonly spaced approximately 4–6 weeks apart to allow the skin to recover and remodel. Q: Is there downtime?
Temporary redness, sensitivity, or mild swelling may last approximately 1–2 days. Recovery varies according to the treatment depth, RF intensity, area, and individual response. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients notice early texture improvements after initial sessions. Collagen remodeling develops gradually, with more visible changes commonly appearing over several weeks. Q: How long can results last?
The supplied estimate is approximately 12–18 months with suitable skincare and maintenance. Individual result duration varies. Q: Is RF microneedling suitable for every skin tone?
Adjustable settings may allow trained professionals to treat a broad range of skin tones. However, suitability and settings must be determined through an individual assessment. Q: Can active acne be treated?
Treatment should not be performed over active infection, open lesions, or significant inflammation. The client should be assessed by an appropriately qualified professional. Q: Can the device be used on scars?
It can support treatments for fully healed acne scars and selected surgical scars. Active wounds and incompletely healed tissue must not be treated. Q: Are cartridges reusable?
Needle cartridges should be sterile and single-use. A new cartridge must be used for every client and every treatment session. Q: What aftercare is recommended?
Clients should follow the professional aftercare plan, use broad-spectrum SPF 30 or higher, avoid harsh skincare for approximately 3–5 days, and avoid swimming, saunas, and excessive heat for at least 48 hours. Q: Who can operate the device?
The operator must have the qualifications, training, licensing, supervision, and insurance required in the location where treatments are provided. Q: Does training come with the machine?
Yes. Professional machine-operation and treatment guidance are included. This training does not replace legally required clinical qualifications or licenses. Q: What certificates are included?
The device is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Clinic
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device provides qualified clinics and aesthetic professionals with an adjustable platform for skin rejuvenation, collagen remodeling, wrinkle care, scar improvement, stretch-mark treatments, and skin tightening. Five key benefits: Combined microneedling and radiofrequency technology Adjustable needle depth from 0.5mm to 4.0mm Four interchangeable cartridge configurations Facial, neck, décolleté, and body applications CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, professional training details, and technical support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Needle Depth
Adjustable from 0.5mm to 4.0mm
Adapts penetration to the skin concern, treatment area, and professional protocol
RF Intensity
Adjustable energy control
Customizes thermal delivery according to skin condition and tolerance
10-Pin Cartridge
Precision cartridge
Treats small and delicate facial areas
25-Pin Cartridge
Standard facial cartridge
Supports complete facial rejuvenation
36-Pin Cartridge
Extended-coverage cartridge
Treats the face, neck, and décolleté efficiently
49-Pin Cartridge
Large-area body cartridge
Supports stretch-mark and body-rejuvenation treatments
Treatment Time
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Allows sessions to be adapted to the treatment area
Treatment Course
Approximately 3–6 sessions
Supports progressive collagen remodeling
Session Interval
Approximately 4–6 weeks
Allows suitable skin-recovery time between treatments
Control Interface
Intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient depth, intensity, and program control
Power Supply
110V/220V compatibility
Supports use in different international markets
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Fine-Line Treatment
Face and eye contour
Improve the appearance of superficial lines
Wrinkle Reduction
Face and neck
Support collagen remodeling and smoother-looking skin
Acne-Scar Care
Face
Improve the appearance of fully healed acne scars
Surgical-Scar Care
Suitable healed scars
Support gradual texture remodeling
Skin Tightening
Face, neck, abdomen, and arms
Improve the appearance of firmness and elasticity
Pore Refinement
Face
Reduce the visible appearance of enlarged pores
Texture Improvement
Face and body
Support smoother and more even-looking skin
Stretch-Mark Care
Abdomen, thighs, and arms
Improve the appearance of stretch marks
Décolleté Rejuvenation
Upper chest
Address texture, lines, and reduced firmness
Collagen Maintenance
Previously treated areas
Support ongoing skin-renewal programs
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device
Technology
Controlled-depth microneedling and radiofrequency energy
Needle-Depth Range
Adjustable from 0.5mm to 4.0mm
RF Energy
Adjustable intensity control
Cartridge Options
10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin
10-Pin Application
Under-eye area, nose, mouth area, small scars, and precision treatments
25-Pin Application
Standard full-face rejuvenation and wrinkle treatments
36-Pin Application
Face, neck, décolleté, and extended treatment zones
49-Pin Application
Abdomen, thighs, arms, stretch marks, and larger body areas
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and arms
Primary Functions
Skin rejuvenation, wrinkle reduction, scar care, stretch-mark improvement, skin tightening, pore refinement, and texture improvement
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 3–6 sessions
Recommended Interval
Approximately 4–6 weeks
Expected Downtime
Commonly 1–2 days of temporary redness or swelling
Results Duration
Supplied estimate of approximately 12–18 months with suitable maintenance
Display and Controls
Intelligent touchscreen interface
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
From $2,499.00
Professional 5D Lipo Laser System
Five-Wavelength Technology for Non-Invasive Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for beauty studios, wellness centers and qualified independent practitioners.
Combining five laser wavelengths with an adjustable multi-pad design, the system enables trained operators to create customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back and other commonly requested body areas.
Available in vertical and portable configurations, the machine provides a practical balance of treatment flexibility, operator control and client comfort.
Five wavelengths | Up to 14 pads | 15 energy levels | Vertical or portable
Advanced Five-Wavelength Technology The system integrates five laser wavelengths within one professional platform: 650 nm 780 nm 808 nm 940 nm 980 nm This multi-wavelength configuration provides greater versatility than a conventional single-wavelength system. Treatment parameters can be adjusted according to the selected area, professional protocol and individual client requirements. Each treatment pad contains 28 diode lasers, depending on the configuration selected, with an output of up to 209 mW per diode. Key Product Advantages Multi-Wavelength System
Five available wavelengths provide greater flexibility when developing professional body-contouring protocols. Adjustable Treatment Parameters
Fifteen energy levels, adjustable pulse timing and continuous or pulsed modes allow the operator to customize each session. Flexible Pad Configuration
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 treatment pads. Independent Pad Cooling
Each treatment pad features an independent wind-cooling system to support stable performance during operation. Multiple Equipment Formats
Choose a vertical unit for a permanent treatment room or a portable unit for smaller spaces and more flexible working arrangements. International Compatibility
The system is available in 110 V and 220 V versions, with US, UK, EU and AU plug options. Professional Body-Contouring Applications The 5D Lipo Laser Machine is designed for non-invasive aesthetic treatments focused on improving the appearance of body contours. Common treatment areas include: Treatment suitability, pad placement and operating parameters should be determined by a trained operator following a complete client consultation. How the System Works The treatment pads are positioned securely over the selected body area using adjustable straps. The operator then selects the treatment duration, energy level and pulse mode according to the recommended protocol. The pads deliver controlled low-level laser energy to the treatment area without surgical incisions, injections or anesthesia. Sessions are designed to be comfortable and generally do not require a surgical recovery period. The system should be used as part of a structured body-contouring program. Individual outcomes vary according to body composition, lifestyle, treatment frequency and the protocol applied. Configurable Treatment-Pad System Large Treatment Pads
The six large pads provide wider coverage for areas such as the abdomen, waist, back, thighs and buttocks. Small Treatment Pads
The two small pads are designed for more targeted placement on areas such as the upper arms and smaller localized zones. Optional Expansion
Selected machine configurations can support up to 14 pads. This provides additional flexibility when covering larger areas or developing multi-pad protocols. Additional treatment pads are sold separately. Compatibility should be confirmed before purchase. Vertical and Portable Options Vertical Configuration
The vertical model provides a refined, professional presentation for dedicated treatment rooms. Its mobile base allows the equipment to be repositioned within the working area when necessary. Recommended for: Beauty studios Aesthetic clinics Body-contouring centers Permanent treatment rooms Higher-volume treatment environments Portable Configuration
The portable model offers a more compact footprint while retaining the core multi-pad functionality of the system. Recommended for: Independent practitioners Smaller studios Limited treatment spaces Professionals requiring easier storage or transportation Controlled, Client-Focused Operation
The system offers adjustable parameters to support professional operation and individual client comfort. Energy adjustment from level 1 to 15 Pulse-time adjustment from 0.1 to 5 seconds Continuous and pulsed operating modes Adjustable session duration Touchscreen control interface Independent cooling for each pad Secure pad-positioning straps IC-card control system Treatment duration may range from approximately 15 to 60 minutes, depending on the selected area and treatment protocol. Technical Specifications Product specifications may vary according to the selected configuration. Confirm the final specification sheet with Wikbeauty before ordering. Standard Package Contents The standard package includes: One 5D Lipo Laser main unit Six large treatment pads Two small treatment pads Treatment-pad connection cables Adjustable securing straps Protective eyewear Power cable with selected plug English user manual Setup and operating guidance Optional pads and accessories can be added according to the selected system configuration. Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides guidance to help buyers understand: Equipment installation Basic system operation Treatment-parameter selection Pad positioning Routine cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Recommended safety procedures Intended Users
This system is designed for professional use by: Aesthetic practitioners Body-contouring specialists Beauty-studio owners Wellness professionals Trained independent operators Qualified entrepreneurs establishing a treatment business Safety and Contraindications A complete consultation and suitability assessment should be performed before every treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Uncontrolled medical conditions Active skin infections Open wounds in the treatment area Photosensitivity or the use of photosensitizing medication Other conditions identified in the operating manual This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied user manual, relevant professional standards and applicable local regulations. Clients should seek medical advice when treatment suitability is uncertain. Why Professionals Choose Wikbeauty Specialized Beauty-Equipment Supply
Wikbeauty provides professional aesthetic and body-contouring equipment to international buyers. Configurable Equipment
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and number of treatment pads according to your operating requirements. International Electrical Options
The system can be prepared for different markets with 110 V or 220 V operation and the appropriate regional plug. Operating Assistance
Support is available for installation, initial setup, routine operation and basic troubleshooting. Direct Purchasing
Buy directly from the equipment supplier and receive assistance when confirming the most appropriate configuration. Frequently Asked Questions
Is this a professional or home-use machine?
This is professional beauty equipment. It should be operated by a trained individual who understands consultation procedures, contraindications, treatment parameters and equipment safety. What is the standard pad configuration?
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 pads. What is the difference between the large and small pads?
Large pads provide broader coverage for areas such as the abdomen, back and thighs. Small pads enable more targeted placement on the arms and other localized areas. Should I choose the vertical or portable version?
The vertical model is suitable for a dedicated professional treatment room. The portable model is better suited to smaller spaces or operators who require easier storage and transportation. How long does a session take?
A session may last approximately 15–60 minutes. Duration varies according to the treatment area, pad configuration, operating parameters and professional protocol. Is there a recovery period?
The treatment is non-invasive and does not involve surgical incisions. Clients can generally resume normal daily activities after a session, subject to individual circumstances and professional guidance. Are results guaranteed?
No aesthetic treatment can guarantee identical results for every person. Outcomes may vary depending on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment schedule and the protocol used. Can I order additional treatment pads?
Additional pads may be purchased for compatible configurations. Confirm the maximum number of supported pads before ordering. Which voltage should I select?
Select the voltage that matches the electrical standard in your country. If uncertain, contact Wikbeauty before completing your purchase. Configure Your 5D Lipo Laser System
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and treatment-pad configuration that best suits your professional requirements. For assistance choosing between the vertical and portable models, contact Wikbeauty before placing your order. Three-Year Warranty
Your Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing additional confidence in your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the warranty terms, coverage includes manufacturing defects and eligible failures involving: Main machine components Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Treatment-pad connections Other eligible parts supplied with the original machine Technical Support
If a covered technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty’s support team will help you: Identify the issue through remote technical assessment Complete basic troubleshooting Determine whether a replacement part or repair is required Receive guidance for installing eligible replacement components Warranty Conditions
The warranty applies to defects arising under normal and proper use. It does not cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse or incorrect operation Unauthorized modification or repair Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of consumable parts and accessories Damage caused during unauthorized transportation Failure to follow the supplied operating instructions The original order information and machine serial number may be required when requesting warranty service. Full coverage is subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty terms. Three years of warranty coverage. Professional technical assistance. Long-term confidence in your purchase. Select Your Configuration and Add to Cart Explore the complete range of professional lipo laser machines. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment area
Typical application
Abdomen
Abdominal contouring
Waist and flanks
Waistline definition
Upper and lower back
Localized body contouring
Upper arms
Arm-contouring treatments
Inner and outer thighs
Thigh shaping
Buttocks
Contour-focused treatments
Legs and calves
Localized lower-body treatments
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 5D lipo laser machine
Technology
Low-level diode laser
Laser wavelengths
650 nm, 780 nm, 808 nm, 940 nm and 980 nm
Diode output
Up to 209 mW per diode
Diodes per pad
28 on big and 3 on a small pad
Standard configuration
6 large pads and 2 small pads
Maximum configuration
Up to 14 treatment pads
Energy adjustment
Levels 1–15
Pulse-time range
0.1–5 seconds
Operating modes
Continuous and pulsed
Treatment duration
Approximately 15–60 minutes
Cooling system
Independent wind cooling for each pad
Control interface
Touchscreen
Additional control
IC-card system
Equipment options
Vertical or portable
Voltage options
110 V or 220 V
Plug options
US, UK, EU and AU
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
From $1,660.77
Professional RF Microneedling Skin Rejuvenation System
Four Cartridge Options for Professional Facial and Body Treatments
The Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine is a professional fractional radiofrequency system developed for aesthetic clinics, medical spas, dermatology practices and professional beauty centers.
The system combines controlled microneedling with radiofrequency energy to support skin tightening, collagen remodeling, wrinkle reduction, acne-scar improvement and body-contouring treatments.
Four cartridge options and an adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm allow trained practitioners to create customized protocols for different facial zones, body areas and skin concerns.
Four cartridge options | 0.2–7.0mm adjustable depth | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Four Cartridge Options on One Professional Platform 12-Pin Cartridge
The 12-pin cartridge is designed for precise treatments and smaller facial areas. Its concentrated treatment pattern makes it suitable for detailed skin-rejuvenation protocols and localized concerns. Common treatment applications include: Fine-line treatments Localized acne scars Under-eye areas Small facial zones Detailed texture-refinement protocols Precision collagen-remodeling treatments 24-Pin Cartridge
The 24-pin cartridge is a versatile option for general facial rejuvenation. It provides balanced treatment coverage for common facial skin concerns and medium-sized treatment areas. Common treatment applications include: Facial skin tightening Wrinkle treatments Uneven skin texture Enlarged-looking pores Mild facial laxity General collagen-remodeling protocols 40-Pin Cartridge
The 40-pin cartridge provides broader treatment coverage for larger facial and body areas. Its wider treatment pattern helps practitioners perform efficient treatments across areas requiring greater coverage. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Thighs Buttocks Upper arms Neck and décolletage Larger facial areas Nano Cartridge
The Nano cartridge is designed for superficial skin-rejuvenation and texture-refinement treatments. It supports surface-focused protocols without the deeper penetration provided by the pin cartridges. Common treatment applications include: Superficial skin refinement Uneven-looking texture Enlarged-looking pores Skin-tone improvement Maintenance-oriented treatments Overall skin-quality programs The appropriate cartridge should be selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Cartridge for Each Treatment
The system supports four cartridge options. The appropriate cartridge should be selected according to the size of the treatment area, required coverage and intended skin-rejuvenation protocol. Option 1: 12-Pin Cartridge
A precision-focused cartridge for smaller treatment areas and localized skin concerns. Recommended applications: Fine lines Localized acne scars Detailed facial treatments Small or delicate treatment zones Recommended for: Precision facial protocols Targeted scar treatments Localized collagen remodeling Clinics offering detailed facial services Option 2: 24-Pin Cartridge
A versatile cartridge for general facial rejuvenation and medium-sized areas. Recommended applications: Facial skin tightening Wrinkle treatments Uneven skin texture Enlarged-looking pores Recommended for: General facial rejuvenation Full-face treatment programs Skin-texture improvement Collagen-stimulation protocols Option 3: 40-Pin Cartridge
A broader-coverage cartridge for larger facial and body areas. Recommended applications: Abdomen treatments Thigh treatments Buttock treatments Upper-arm treatments Recommended for: Body skin-firming programs Larger treatment areas Efficient body protocols Clinics expanding into face and body treatments Option 4: Nano Cartridge
A superficial cartridge for skin refinement and maintenance-oriented treatments. Recommended applications: Surface texture refinement Skin-tone improvement Enlarged-looking pores Superficial rejuvenation Recommended for: Gentle skin-quality treatments Maintenance protocols Surface-focused facial services Clients requiring superficial applications Precision Depth Control for Customized RF Microneedling
The system offers an adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm. Each depth should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness, cartridge type and professional protocol. The adjustable depth gives trained operators greater control over treatment placement and protocol customization. The correct depth must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment area. Adjustable Treatment Depths
Different needle depths support different professional treatment requirements. Superficial Depths
0.2mm to 1.0mm Surface-focused skin-refinement protocols Fine-line appearance Delicate facial zones Maintenance-oriented treatments Mid-Depth Treatments
1.0mm to 3.0mm General facial rejuvenation Skin-tightening protocols Uneven texture Acne-scar appearance Collagen-remodeling treatments Deeper Treatments
3.0mm to 7.0mm Appropriately selected body areas Abdomen, thighs, buttocks and upper arms Body skin-firming protocols Deeper professional treatment programs Professional Face and Body Applications
The available treatments depend on the cartridge, needle depth and professional protocol selected. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s skin concerns, medical history, previous treatments, treatment goals and suitability. The appropriate cartridge, needle depth and RF parameters are then selected. 2. System Preparation
The selected cartridge is installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the handpiece and cartridge are correctly connected before beginning treatment. 3. Parameter Selection
Needle depth, RF energy, frequency and other available settings are selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and professional protocol. 4. Treatment Application
The operator applies the treatment handpiece to the selected area using the appropriate technique. Session duration varies according to the cartridge, treatment depth, area size and protocol. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare instructions. Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, dryness, pinpoint marks or other expected skin responses may occur following RF microneedling treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines a 10.4-inch control screen with adjustable RF microneedling technology for streamlined use in professional settings. Key operating advantages include: 10.4-inch control screen Four interchangeable cartridge options Adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm Face and body treatment capability Adjustable 1–15MHz RF frequency Specialized 6MHz thermal RF mode Maximum 500W output power Compact vertical professional design Technical Specifications What Is Included?
Package contents include the main equipment, treatment handpiece, cartridge options and professional operating guidance. Standard Equipment
One RF microneedling main unit One professional treatment handpiece 12-pin cartridge 24-pin cartridge 40-pin cartridge Nano cartridge Treatment-handle connection components Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine setup guidance Cartridge installation guidance Needle-depth selection training RF-parameter guidance Facial and body treatment guidance Safety and operating instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Treatment-handpiece operation Cartridge installation Cartridge selection Needle-depth adjustment Control-interface operation RF-parameter selection Facial and body treatment protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Control screen and operating system Original treatment handpiece Handpiece-connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-handpiece operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of cartridges and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional RF microneedling equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin disorders Recent isotretinoin use Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area Conditions affecting normal healing A history of abnormal or keloid scarring Other contraindications listed in the operating manual RF microneedling cartridges must be handled according to professional hygiene and infection-control requirements. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Dermatology practices Professional beauty centers Skin-rejuvenation professionals Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their facial and body treatment services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose This RF Microneedling System? Select the Appropriate Cartridge
Four cartridge options allow practitioners to select the appropriate coverage pattern for different facial zones, body areas and skin concerns. Treat the Face and Body
The system supports professional protocols for the face, jawline, neck, décolletage, abdomen, thighs, buttocks and upper arms. Work at Adjustable Treatment Depths
The adjustable 0.2–7.0mm depth range supports superficial, mid-depth and deeper professional applications. Expand Your Service Menu
One professional platform can support facial rejuvenation, skin tightening, wrinkle treatments, acne-scar protocols, texture refinement and body skin-firming services. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the four cartridges?
The 12-pin cartridge supports precise and localized treatments. The 24-pin cartridge is suitable for general facial rejuvenation. The 40-pin cartridge provides broader coverage for larger face and body areas. The Nano cartridge supports superficial skin-refinement protocols. How is RF microneedling different from traditional microneedling?
Traditional microneedling creates controlled microchannels without delivering radiofrequency energy. This system combines microneedling with RF energy to support thermal collagen remodeling, skin tightening and texture improvement. What is the adjustable needle-depth range?
The needle depth can be adjusted from 0.2mm to 7.0mm. The appropriate depth should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness, cartridge and professional protocol. Which cartridge is best for facial treatments?
The 12-pin and 24-pin cartridges are suitable for many professional facial protocols. The final selection depends on the treatment area, skin condition and required coverage. Which cartridge is best for body treatments?
The 40-pin cartridge provides broader coverage for larger body areas such as the abdomen, thighs, buttocks and upper arms. How long does a treatment take?
A typical session takes approximately 30–60 minutes. Treatment time varies according to the selected area, cartridge, depth and professional protocol. How quickly will clients see results?
Results vary according to the treatment area, skin condition, treatment parameters and individual biological response. Progressive improvement may develop as the skin-remodeling process continues. Is there downtime?
Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, dryness or pinpoint marks may occur after treatment. The duration varies according to treatment depth, RF settings and individual response. Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine combines: Four professional cartridge options Adjustable 0.2–7.0mm needle depth A 10.4-inch control screen Professional face and body applications Three-year parts warranty and lifetime support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its cartridges, treatment applications and professional training. Order Your RF Microneedling Machine and Request a Quote Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Depth Range
Recommended Application
0.2–1.0mm
Superficial skin-refinement and delicate-area protocols
1.0–2.0mm
General facial rejuvenation and fine-line treatments
2.0–4.0mm
Deeper facial skin tightening and scar-remodeling protocols
4.0–7.0mm
Appropriately selected body areas and deeper professional applications
Treatment Area
Applicable Cartridge
Intended Aesthetic Application
Under-eye area
12-pin
Delicate skin-firming and fine-line protocols
Face and cheeks
12-pin or 24-pin
Facial rejuvenation and texture improvement
Jawline and lower face
24-pin
Skin tightening and contour refinement
Neck and décolletage
24-pin or 40-pin
Firming and texture-improvement protocols
Acne scars
12-pin or 24-pin
Targeted collagen-remodeling treatments
Abdomen
40-pin
Body skin firming and texture improvement
Thighs and buttocks
40-pin
Body rejuvenation and firming protocols
Superficial facial areas
Nano
Texture, tone and skin-quality improvement
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine
Product Type
Professional fractional RF microneedling system
Technology
Fractional radiofrequency microneedling
Maximum Output Power
500W
Input Voltage
100V / 110V / 220V
Control Interface
10.4-inch control screen
RF Frequency
1–15MHz adjustable
Thermal RF Mode
6MHz
Cartridge Options
12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin and Nano
Adjustable Needle Depth
0.2–7.0mm
Treatment-Area Sizes
1.1 × 1.1cm, 1.6 × 1.6cm, 1.6 × 1.5cm and 2 × 2cm
Machine Dimensions
40 × 36 × 81cm
Machine Weight
13.3kg
Package Dimensions
49 × 46 × 102cm
Package Weight
28.4kg
Intended Applications
Skin tightening, wrinkle reduction, acne-scar improvement, texture refinement and body treatments
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Lifetime technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$549.00
Professional Lipo Laser Slimming Machine
Non-Invasive Fat Reduction, Body Slimming, and Contouring System
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to support targeted fat reduction, inch loss, and improved body shape without surgery or downtime.
Using 650nm low-level laser therapy, the system delivers controlled red-light energy through multiple laser pads positioned over selected treatment areas. This energy supports the release of stored triglycerides from fat cells as free fatty acids and glycerol, which are then processed naturally by the body.
With an intelligent touchscreen, multiple body applicators, and universal 110V/220V compatibility, the machine is suitable for slimming salons, spas, wellness centers, fitness clinics, and professional aesthetic practices.
650nm Lipo Laser | Multiple Treatment Pads | 20–40-Minute Sessions | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform Lipo Laser Fat-Reduction Technology
The machine uses 650nm low-level laser therapy to target localized fat deposits without surgery, needles, or anesthesia. Multiple laser pads deliver controlled energy across the selected treatment area. Common applications include: Localized fat-reduction treatments Waist and abdominal contouring Arm and thigh slimming Hip, flank, and back shaping Buttock contour refinement Body Sculpting and Inch-Loss Treatments
The flexible laser-pad system allows operators to position applicators around different body zones. This supports customized slimming programs based on the client’s proportions and treatment objectives. Common applications include: Waistline definition Abdominal contour improvement Arm and thigh reshaping Hip and flank contouring Multi-area body-sculpting programs Cellulite and Skin-Quality Support
Lipo laser treatments can be incorporated into professional programs designed to improve the appearance of uneven skin texture while supporting smoother and firmer-looking skin. Common applications include: Cellulite-appearance reduction Skin-texture improvement Firmness and elasticity support Post-slimming skin conditioning Body-smoothing treatments Select the Right Program for Each Client Targeted Fat-Reduction Program
Designed for clients with localized areas of stubborn fat that may be resistant to regular diet and exercise. Recommended applications: Abdomen, waist, hips, thighs, arms, back, and flanks. Recommended for: Clients seeking focused treatment of one or two specific body areas. Complete Body-Contouring Program
A multi-area protocol that uses several laser pads to support balanced body shaping and improved proportions. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, thighs and hips, arms and back, or other compatible area combinations. Recommended for: Clients seeking a more comprehensive body-sculpting course. Cellulite and Skin-Smoothing Program
A treatment program focused on the appearance of uneven texture, cellulite, and reduced skin firmness. Recommended applications: Thighs, hips, buttocks, abdomen, and upper arms. Recommended for: Clients who want smoother-looking skin alongside body-contouring benefits. Maintenance and Shape-Management Program
A flexible follow-up program designed to support previously achieved contouring results. Recommended applications: Previously treated body areas requiring periodic maintenance. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and want ongoing body-contouring support. Adjustable Laser and Treatment Settings Treatment settings, session frequency, and pad positioning should be selected according to the client’s assessment, treatment area, comfort, and professional operating protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Upper-Body Areas
Treatment pads can be positioned on suitable upper-body zones where localized fat deposits or reduced definition are present. Treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Back-fat reduction support Flank shaping Waistline definition Improved upper-body proportions Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdomen and waist are common areas for professional lipo laser body-contouring programs. Treatment objectives include: Abdominal contouring Waistline slimming Localized inch-loss support Flank and side shaping Improved midsection definition Lower-Body Areas
Multiple pads can be arranged across compatible lower-body treatment zones. Treatment objectives include: Inner- and outer-thigh contouring Hip shaping Buttock contour refinement Cellulite-appearance improvement Smoother-looking lower-body contours Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s treatment goals, medical history, lifestyle, current body condition, and potential contraindications. Step 2: Body Assessment
Identify suitable treatment areas, document measurements when required, and create a personalized treatment plan. Step 3: Laser-Pad Placement
Position the laser pads securely over the selected treatment areas according to the operating protocol. Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the appropriate treatment time and operating settings using the intelligent touchscreen interface. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes. Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated area, and provide suitable hydration, nutrition, activity, and treatment-course guidance. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine combines a straightforward operating system with flexible applicator placement, making it suitable for a variety of professional body-contouring businesses. Key advantages include: Non-invasive treatment technology Multiple laser pads for flexible positioning Intelligent touchscreen operation Single-area and multi-area treatment capability Approximately 20–40-minute sessions No surgical recovery period 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year warranty Technical Specifications Treatment experiences and visible outcomes may vary according to the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment area, treatment frequency, and adherence to the recommended course. Results should not be presented as guaranteed. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine Multiple laser-pad body applicators 1 × Compatible power cable 1 × Warranty card Standard accessories required for machine operation Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guidance Operating instructions Laser-pad placement guidance Treatment protocol training Safety and maintenance instructions After-sales technical support Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help owners and treatment providers use the machine confidently and consistently. Training and support cover: Machine installation and initial setup Touchscreen operation Laser-pad positioning Treatment-area selection Session configuration Client assessment procedures Safety and contraindication screening Cleaning and routine maintenance Troubleshooting assistance Treatment-protocol guidance Ongoing after-sales support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults under normal operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair instructions are issued. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting assistance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair guidance Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication throughout the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty support team with the machine model and order information. Provide a clear description of the issue. Submit photos or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the machine. Follow the provided troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect operation Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Water damage or unsuitable storage conditions Failure to follow maintenance instructions Normal wear of consumable components Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and contraindication screening should be completed before treatment. The machine should be operated only by trained users following the supplied instructions and applicable local requirements. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Serious cardiovascular conditions Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Severe liver or kidney conditions Uncontrolled diabetes Blood-clotting disorders Active infection or inflammation Open wounds or damaged skin in the treatment area Recent surgery in the intended treatment area Photosensitivity or use of photosensitizing medication Any medical condition requiring professional clearance Clients with medical concerns should consult a qualified healthcare professional before treatment. Operating Precautions
Complete a client consultation before every initial treatment. Inspect the machine, cables, and laser pads before use. Clean and disinfect applicators according to the manual. Position laser pads securely without excessive pressure. Do not apply pads over open wounds or inflamed skin. Do not exceed the recommended treatment time. Monitor client comfort throughout the session. Stop treatment if the client experiences an unexpected reaction. Keep the machine away from excessive moisture and heat. Use a stable and correctly grounded power supply. Follow the recommended cleaning and maintenance schedule. Keep accurate treatment records when required. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine is suitable for: Body-slimming salons Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Wellness centers Day spas and medical spas Fitness and body-transformation centers Weight-management businesses Professional body-contouring providers Users must follow the supplied operating instructions, complete appropriate training, and comply with local regulations governing aesthetic equipment. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine? 1. Professional 650nm Lipo Laser Technology
The system uses 650nm low-level laser therapy to support non-invasive fat-reduction and body-contouring treatments. 2. Multiple Laser-Pad Applicators
Flexible pad placement allows professionals to target different body areas and create customized treatment programs. 3. Non-Invasive Client Experience
Treatments require no surgery, needles, anesthesia, or extended recovery period, making the service convenient for suitable clients. 4. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating guidance, treatment training, technical assistance, and after-sales support. 5. Three-Year Warranty and Certified Quality
The system includes a three-year professional warranty and is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine work?
The system uses 650nm low-level laser energy delivered through body applicators. The treatment supports the release of stored triglycerides from fat cells into free fatty acids and glycerol, which are processed naturally by the body. Q: Is the treatment invasive?
No. Lipo laser is a non-invasive body-contouring treatment that does not require surgery, injections, or anesthesia. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Most clients describe the treatment as comfortable and relaxing. Individual sensitivity can vary, so client comfort should be monitored throughout every session. Q: How long does one session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, depending on the treatment area and selected protocol. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A complete course generally includes approximately 8–12 sessions. The final recommendation should be based on the client’s assessment and treatment objectives. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice changes after the first few sessions, while more developed results usually require completion of the recommended treatment course. Individual outcomes vary. Q: Which body areas can be treated?
Compatible areas include the abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, hips, back, flanks, and buttocks. Q: Can multiple areas be treated during one session?
The multiple-pad system supports simultaneous placement across compatible treatment zones. Operators must follow the recommended pad arrangement and treatment protocol. Q: Is there any downtime?
Lipo laser treatments generally do not require a surgical recovery period. Suitable clients can normally return to their usual activities after treatment. Q: Can the machine help improve the appearance of cellulite?
The system can be incorporated into professional programs designed to improve body contours and the appearance of uneven skin texture. Q: Does the machine provide skin-tightening benefits?
Treatments can support smoother and firmer-looking skin as part of a structured body-contouring program. Q: Are lipo laser results permanent?
Results depend on the client’s lifestyle, nutrition, physical activity, treatment course, and weight stability. The service should not be marketed as guaranteeing permanent fat loss. Q: What should clients do after treatment?
Clients are generally advised to remain hydrated, maintain balanced nutrition, and follow appropriate activity and aftercare guidance provided by the treatment professional. Q: Is the machine suitable for every client?
No. Every client should complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment. Q: Can the machine be used on all skin types?
Low-level laser therapy may be suitable for a broad range of skin types, but individual assessment and contraindication screening remain necessary. Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility. Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Professional setup, operating, treatment-protocol, safety, and maintenance guidance are included. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Q: What is included with the machine?
The package includes the main machine, multiple laser-pad applicators, a compatible power cable, a user manual and training guide, a warranty card, and standard operating accessories. Add Professional Lipo Laser Slimming to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine gives salons, spas, wellness centers, and aesthetic clinics a versatile solution for non-invasive fat reduction, body contouring, cellulite care, and skin-quality treatments. Five key benefits: Professional 650nm low-level laser technology Multiple pads for flexible body-area treatment Non-invasive 20–40-minute sessions Intelligent touchscreen operation CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Laser Wavelength
650nm red light
Supports professional low-level laser body-contouring treatments
Treatment Time
Adjustable within the recommended 20–40-minute range
Allows sessions to be adapted to the selected area and protocol
Laser Pads
Multiple body applicators
Supports simultaneous treatment of compatible body areas
Treatment Area
Single-area or multi-area positioning
Enables targeted and comprehensive body-contouring programs
Treatment Course
Approximately 8–12 sessions recommended
Supports progressive results through a structured treatment plan
Control Interface
Intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient treatment selection and operating control
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Abdominal Slimming
Abdomen
Support localized fat reduction and improved abdominal contour
Waistline Contouring
Waist and flanks
Create a more defined waistline
Arm Slimming
Upper arms
Improve arm shape and reduce the appearance of localized fullness
Thigh Contouring
Inner and outer thighs
Support smoother and more balanced leg contours
Hip Shaping
Hips
Improve overall body proportions
Back Contouring
Upper and lower back
Target localized fat deposits and improve back definition
Buttock Contouring
Buttocks
Refine shape and improve surrounding contours
Cellulite Care
Thighs, hips, and buttocks
Improve the appearance of uneven skin texture
Skin-Firming Support
Multiple body areas
Support smoother and firmer-looking skin
Multi-Area Sculpting
Combined body zones
Deliver a customized body-contouring program
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine
Technology
Low-Level Laser Therapy
Laser Wavelength
650nm red light
Primary Functions
Fat reduction, body slimming, body contouring, cellulite care, and skin-tightening support
Applicators
Multiple laser pads for different body areas
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, hips, back, flanks, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 8–12 sessions
Display and Controls
Intelligent touchscreen interface
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
From $3,909.02
Professional Four-Handle NEO EMShape Body-Sculpting System
Straight and Curved Electromagnetic Applicators for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, fat-reduction support, and improved definition across multiple body areas.
The system combines EMShape electromagnetic technology with four ergonomic applicators: two straight handles for conventional placement and two curved handles designed for improved contact across contoured anatomical areas.
With approximately 20,000 contractions per session, adjustable treatment settings, a 15-inch intelligent touchscreen, air-and-water cooling, and a professional vertical design, the machine is suitable for body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, slimming centers, fitness facilities, and wellness studios.
EMShape technology | Two straight and two curved handles | Vertical design | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform EMShape Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
EMShape technology delivers high-intensity electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock muscle stimulation Thigh muscle conditioning Upper-arm toning Waistline definition Calf muscle stimulation Straight and Curved Applicator Treatment
The system includes two straight and two curved handles for different body shapes and placement requirements. Common benefits include: Conventional straight-handle placement Improved contact on curved body areas Focused muscle stimulation Bilateral treatment capability Multi-area treatment flexibility Customized applicator positioning Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives. Common applications include: Abdomen and thigh treatments Arms and abdomen Buttocks and thighs Waistline and love-handle areas Bilateral calf treatments Customized multi-area programs Select the Right Program for Each Client Abdominal and Waistline Program
Uses suitable straight or curved applicators to stimulate abdominal muscles and support midsection definition. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Core-area stimulation Waistline sculpting Love-handle-area programs General midsection definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved abdominal tone Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation Clients following healthy lifestyle programs Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for lower-body treatment. Recommended applications: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatments Shape-enhancement programs Lower-body definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone Clients combining treatment with exercise Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs Arm and Calf Program
Uses the available applicators for suitable upper-arm and calf muscle-conditioning programs. Recommended applications: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Biceps and triceps conditioning Calf muscle stimulation Bilateral limb treatments Improved-looking muscle definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved arm or calf tone Fitness and body-contouring clients Clients requiring smaller-area placement Multi-Area Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment after completion of the client’s initial NEO EMSlim course. Recommended applications: Muscle-tone maintenance Body-contour maintenance Multi-area conditioning Fitness-program support Seasonal body-sculpting treatments Recommended for: Returning NEO EMSlim clients Clients completing six to eight initial sessions Clients combining treatment with regular exercise Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatments according to applicator type, body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol. Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen and Waistline
Straight or curved handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle activation Core-area conditioning Waistline definition Love-handle-area treatment Multi-zone midsection sculpting Buttocks and Thighs
Curved and straight applicators support customized placement across suitable lower-body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatment Improved-looking definition Lower-body sculpting Arms and Calves
The applicator selection supports suitable upper-arm and lower-leg treatment programs. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Arm definition Calf muscle conditioning Bilateral limb treatment Customized smaller-area programs Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Applicator Selection and Placement
Select straight or curved handles according to the treatment area and client anatomy. Position and secure the applicators over suitable muscle groups. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate program and begin with conservative energy settings. Adjust the intensity according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response. Step 4: EMShape Treatment
The system delivers electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine combines EMShape technology with straight and curved applicator options. Key advantages include: Professional EMShape technology Four ergonomic treatment handles Two straight applicators Two curved applicators Approximately 20,000 contractions per session Focused, bilateral, and multi-area configurations Treatments for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, and calves Vertical professional design Adjustable energy intensity 15-inch intelligent touchscreen Air-and-water circulation cooling Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Six- to eight-session treatment programs 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications
Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary. What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim main unit 2 × Straight EMShape treatment applicators 2 × Curved EMShape treatment applicators Applicator connection cables Applicator-positioning accessories 15-inch intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls Air-and-water circulation cooling system 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Straight-handle placement guidance Curved-handle placement guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Abdominal and waistline protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Calf-treatment protocols Multi-area treatment guidance Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Treatment-area assessment Straight-handle placement Curved-handle placement Applicator selection by body area Energy-level adjustment Abdominal and waistline protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Calf-treatment protocols Multi-area treatment planning Client monitoring Post-treatment guidance Cooling-system maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Cardiac rhythm disorders Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active muscle injury Severe inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery within the treatment area Serious neurological or muscular conditions Reduced or impaired sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment. Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use. Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation. Remove metal objects from each treatment area. Select the correct straight or curved applicator. Confirm correct applicator placement before activation. Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions. Begin with conservative energy levels. Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort. Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment. Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas. Record applicator type, treatment area, duration, and energy settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Premium body-sculpting clinics Medical spas Slimming centers Aesthetic salons Fitness facilities Gyms Wellness centers Professional body-contouring studios Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering EMShape or HI-EMT treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine? Straight and Curved Applicators
Two straight and two curved handles support customized placement across different body shapes and treatment areas. Professional EMShape Technology
The system provides approximately 20,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session. Multiple Treatment Areas
One machine supports customized programs for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves. Professional Cooling and Controls
The 15-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, straight- and curved-handle guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional electromagnetic body-sculpting system with two straight and two curved applicators. What is EMShape technology?
EMShape is the supplied electromagnetic muscle-stimulation technology used by this system to produce repeated involuntary muscle contractions. What is different about the curved handles?
The curved applicators are designed to improve placement and contact across suitable contoured body areas. Correct selection depends on the client’s anatomy and treatment area. Do curved handles guarantee deeper muscle engagement?
No. Treatment depth and response depend on the electromagnetic output, applicator position, client anatomy, settings, and individual response. How many applicators are included?
The package includes four handles: two straight applicators and two curved applicators. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves. Can all four handles be used simultaneously?
The four-handle system supports suitable multi-area operation according to the selected protocol and machine configuration. How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response. Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur. Can EMShape replace regular exercise?
EMShape treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course. What performance figures are supplied?
The supplied information lists muscle-definition improvement of up to 30% and fat reduction of up to 20%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes. How long can results last?
Results may last six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, applicator selection, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response. What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, straight- and curved-handle placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Curved-Handle EMShape Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine enables body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, and wellness professionals to provide customized electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments using straight and curved applicators. Five key benefits: Professional EMShape electromagnetic technology Two straight and two curved ergonomic applicators Approximately 20,000 contractions per session A 15-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Technology
EMShape electromagnetic stimulation
Muscle-conditioning treatments
Treatment Handles
Four
Multi-area treatment capability
Straight Handles
Two
Conventional and precise placement
Curved Handles
Two
Contoured and ergonomic placement
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Intensive muscle activation
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Efficient treatment scheduling
Treatment Course
Six to eight sessions
Structured body-sculpting program
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Personalized client comfort
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports continuous operation
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Applicator Configuration
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
Straight or curved handles
Waistline
Contouring and core-area stimulation
Curved-handle placement
Love Handles
Side-body conditioning
Curved-handle placement
Buttocks
Toning and shape-enhancement support
Bilateral curved or straight handles
Inner and Outer Thighs
Lower-body conditioning
Suitable bilateral placement
Upper Arms
Arm muscle stimulation and definition
Straight handles
Calves
Lower-leg muscle conditioning
Suitable straight or curved handles
Multiple Areas
Comprehensive body-sculpting program
Up to four handles
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine
Machine Power
7500W
Magnetic Field Strength
15 Tesla
RF Function
Yes, built-in radiofrequency
Net Weight
Approximately 88 kg
Machine Dimensions
72 × 72 × 120 cm
Display
15-inch intelligent touchscreen
Technology
HI-EMT with EMShape technology
Design
Vertical tower
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Straight Handles
Two
Curved Handles
Two
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Primary Functions
Muscle conditioning and body contouring
Supplied Performance Figures
Up to 30% increased muscle definition and 20% fat reduction
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves
Treatment Configuration
Focused, bilateral, or multi-area
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Six to eight sessions
Recommended Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$1,999.00
Professional 360-Degree Cryolipolysis System
Multiple Applicators for Non-Invasive Body Contouring Treatments
The Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine is a professional controlled-cooling system developed for medical spas, body-contouring studios, aesthetic clinics and professional beauty centers.
Its 360-degree applicator design provides consistent cooling coverage across the selected treatment area. Multiple applicator sizes allow trained operators to create customized protocols for the abdomen, waist, flanks, back, thighs and upper arms.
The system is designed for non-invasive treatment of suitable localized fat deposits without surgery, needles or anesthesia.
360-degree cooling | Multiple applicator sizes | Adjustable temperature | Three-year warranty
Four Body-Contouring Applications on One Professional Platform Abdomen Treatments
Cryolipolysis applicators can be positioned over suitable localized fat deposits on the abdomen. An appropriately sized applicator should be selected according to the dimensions, thickness and shape of the treatment area. Common applications include: Upper-abdomen contouring Lower-abdomen contouring Localized abdominal fat Central body-contouring programs Multi-session abdominal protocols Customized abdomen treatments Waist and Flank Treatments
The system supports professional contouring treatments for suitable localized fat deposits around the waist and flanks. Common applications include: Waist-contour refinement Love-handle treatments Side-body contouring Lower-back treatments Flank-reduction programs Customized waist protocols Thigh Treatments
Multiple applicator sizes support professional treatments for suitable areas of the inner and outer thighs. Common applications include: Inner-thigh contouring Outer-thigh contouring Upper-thigh treatments Localized thigh areas Lower-body contouring Multi-area thigh protocols Upper-Arm and Back Treatments
Smaller applicators may be selected for suitable localized fat deposits on the upper arms, back and bra-line areas. Common applications include: Upper-arm contouring Upper-back treatments Lower-back treatments Bra-line areas Small localized fat deposits Customized body-contouring programs The appropriate applicator should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness, client suitability and professional protocol. Select the Right Applicator for Each Treatment Area The system supports multiple applicator sizes. The appropriate applicator should be selected according to the size, shape and thickness of the intended treatment area. Application 1: Abdomen
A body-contouring application for suitable localized abdominal fat deposits. Recommended applications: Upper abdomen Lower abdomen Central abdominal areas Broader treatment zones Recommended for: Abdominal-contouring programs Multi-session body treatments Clients with suitable localized fat Clinics offering focused abdomen services Application 2: Waist and Flanks
A targeted application for localized fat deposits around the sides of the body. Recommended applications: Waist Love handles Flanks Lower back Recommended for: Waist-contouring treatments Side-body refinement Multi-area body packages Clinics offering torso-contouring services Application 3: Thighs
A lower-body application for suitable inner- and outer-thigh areas. Recommended applications: Inner thighs Outer thighs Upper thighs Localized lower-body areas Recommended for: Thigh-contouring programs Lower-body packages Multi-area treatments Body-contouring clinics Application 4: Upper Arms and Back
A targeted application for smaller localized fat deposits. Recommended applications: Upper arms Upper back Lower back Bra-line areas Recommended for: Smaller treatment zones Targeted contouring services Customized treatment packages Clinics expanding their body-treatment menu Precision Cooling for Customized Cryolipolysis Treatments
The 360 Cryolipolysis Machine provides an adjustable cooling range from 5°C to −11°C. Each setting should be selected according to the applicator, treatment area, tissue condition and professional protocol. The adjustable cooling system gives trained operators greater control over treatment temperature and client comfort. The correct temperature, suction level and treatment duration must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment area. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Different applicators support different body areas and professional contouring protocols. Torso Treatments
Upper abdomen Lower abdomen Waist Flanks Upper back Lower back Lower-Body Treatments
Inner thighs Outer thighs Upper thighs Other suitable localized areas Multi-area lower-body programs Smaller Treatment Areas
Upper arms Bra-line areas Small back areas Other appropriately selected localized fat deposits Professional Body-Contouring Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected applicator, cooling temperature, suction setting and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s medical history, treatment goals, tissue condition and suitability. The intended areas are measured and an appropriate treatment plan is created. 2. Skin and Applicator Preparation
The selected area is exposed and prepared according to the operating protocol. A protective antifreeze membrane is placed correctly over the skin before applicator attachment. 3. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the applicator, cooling temperature, suction level, session duration and other available settings according to the treatment area and professional protocol. 4. Controlled Cooling Treatment
The applicator is positioned securely over the localized fat deposit. The system applies controlled cooling for approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the selected area and protocol. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
The applicator and protective membrane are removed. The operator inspects the treated area and performs the recommended post-treatment procedure. Temporary redness, firmness, bruising, tenderness, tingling, numbness or sensitivity may occur following treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital controls with adjustable 360-degree cooling technology for streamlined use in professional body-contouring settings. Key operating advantages include: Digital control display Adjustable 5°C to −11°C cooling range 360-degree applicator coverage Multiple applicator sizes Adjustable treatment parameters Automatic temperature control Protective skin membranes 110V–240V power compatibility Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main cryolipolysis system, treatment applicators and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One 360 Cryolipolysis control system Multiple treatment applicators Applicator connection components Protective antifreeze membranes Required treatment accessories Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine setup guidance Applicator installation instructions Treatment-area assessment guidance Cooling and suction parameter guidance Protective-membrane instructions Safety and contraindication information Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Applicator installation Digital-control operation Applicator-size selection Cooling-temperature adjustment Suction-level selection Treatment-area assessment Protective-membrane application Basic body-contouring protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital display and control system Internal cooling components Original treatment applicators Applicator connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect applicator operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of membranes and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional cryolipolysis equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation, tissue assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Cryoglobulinemia Cold agglutinin disease Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria Severe cold sensitivity Raynaud’s disease Uncontrolled cardiovascular conditions Severe circulation disorders Open wounds or active infections Severe skin conditions in the treatment area Impaired sensation Bleeding disorders Recent surgery Hernia in or near the treatment area Other contraindications listed in the operating manual The protective antifreeze membrane must be positioned correctly before cooling begins. The skin and applicator contact must be monitored throughout the session. Possible treatment responses include temporary redness, bruising, swelling, firmness, tenderness, cramping, tingling, numbness and changes in skin sensitivity. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Medical spas Aesthetic clinics Body-contouring studios Professional beauty centers Wellness clinics Trained body-contouring practitioners Qualified healthcare professionals Businesses expanding their non-invasive body services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine? Treat Multiple Body Areas
Multiple applicator sizes support professional treatments for the abdomen, waist, flanks, back, thighs and upper arms. Provide Consistent Cooling Coverage
The 360-degree applicator design distributes cooling across the selected treatment area for consistent professional application. Customize Every Treatment
Adjustable cooling, suction, duration and applicator selection allow treatments to be adapted to tissue condition and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The system allows clinics to add non-invasive body-contouring treatments, multi-area packages and customized treatment programs. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is cryolipolysis?
Cryolipolysis is a non-invasive body-contouring treatment that applies controlled cooling to suitable localized fat tissue. The body gradually processes affected cells following treatment. What does 360-degree cooling mean?
The applicator distributes cooling around the treatment surface, providing consistent coverage across the selected localized area. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas may include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper and lower back, inner and outer thighs and upper arms. How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–60 minutes per treatment area. The exact duration depends on the applicator, treatment zone and professional protocol. How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course may include approximately 1–3 sessions per area, commonly spaced several weeks apart. The final protocol depends on tissue condition, treatment goals and individual response. When may clients notice changes?
Changes may develop gradually over several weeks as the body processes the affected cells. The result and timeline vary according to the treatment area, tissue thickness and individual response. Is cryolipolysis uncomfortable?
Clients commonly feel cold, pulling or pressure when treatment begins, followed by temporary numbness. Tenderness, bruising or sensitivity may occur after treatment. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, bruising, tenderness or numbness may occur. Are results permanent?
Affected fat cells processed by the body do not regenerate in the same way. However, remaining fat cells can enlarge with future weight gain, so stable weight and healthy lifestyle habits remain important. Is professional training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Professional Cryolipolysis to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine combines: 360-degree controlled cooling Multiple professional applicator sizes Adjustable 5°C to −11°C temperature settings Professional multi-area body-contouring applications Three-year parts warranty and lifetime support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its applicators, treatment protocols and professional training. Order Your 360 Cryolipolysis Machine and Request a Quote Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Cooling Level
Recommended Application
Mild Cooling
Initial assessment and comfort-focused protocols
Moderate Cooling
General professional body-contouring treatments
Lower Temperature
Appropriately selected protocols for suitable tissue
Customized Cooling
Treatment-specific settings based on professional assessment
Treatment Area
Applicable Applicator
Intended Aesthetic Application
Upper abdomen
Suitable large applicator
Abdominal-contour refinement
Lower abdomen
Suitable large applicator
Localized body contouring
Waist and flanks
Medium or contoured applicator
Side-body contour refinement
Inner thighs
Suitable medium applicator
Lower-body contouring
Outer thighs
Suitable medium or large applicator
Thigh-contour refinement
Upper arms
Suitable small applicator
Targeted arm contouring
Upper and lower back
Suitable applicator
Localized back treatment
Bra-line area
Suitable small applicator
Targeted contour refinement
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine
Product Type
Professional non-invasive body-contouring system
Technology
Controlled cryolipolysis cooling
Cooling Range
5°C to −11°C
Coverage Design
360-degree applicator cooling
Applicator Options
Multiple sizes for different body areas
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes per treatment area
Recommended Protocol
Commonly 1–3 sessions per area, depending on assessment
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, flanks, back, thighs and upper arms
Safety Features
Automatic temperature control, protective membranes and safety monitoring
Control Interface
Digital display with preset cryolipolysis programs
Power Supply
110V–240V
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$1,499.00
Professional Vibration Massage and Body Wellness System
Five Massage Heads for Customized Relaxation and Body-Care Treatments
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine is a professional massage and wellness platform developed for beauty salons, spas, body-contouring studios and wellness clinics.
The system combines adjustable vibration and percussion therapy with five interchangeable massage heads. An optional 40K vacuum-heating function supports additional professional body-care and contouring programs.
Its digital controls, ergonomic treatment handpiece and portable wheeled design allow trained operators to customize treatments for the arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck and shoulders.
Vibration and percussion therapy | Five massage heads | Optional 40K vacuum heating | Three-year warranty
Six Professional Functions on One Massage Platform Vibration Massage
The vibration function delivers rapid mechanical movements to suitable muscles and body tissue. Common applications include: General body massage Muscle relaxation Tired-muscle treatments Body-wellness programs Post-workout support Maintenance-oriented massage Percussion Therapy
The percussion function provides controlled repetitive movement for professional massage and recovery programs. Common applications include: Localized muscle tension Larger muscle groups Back and shoulder treatments Thigh and leg massage Fitness-recovery programs General relaxation Circulation and Drainage Support
Mechanical vibration can be incorporated into professionally planned circulation and fluid-movement programs. Common applications include: Tired-leg treatments General circulation support Temporary water-retention programs Body-care services Post-treatment massage Wellness-maintenance sessions Optional 40K Vacuum Heating
The optional 40K vacuum-heating configuration combines suction and controlled warmth with the base massage platform. Common applications include: Cellulite-appearance programs Body-contour refinement Skin-firming support Abdomen and thigh treatments Circulation-focused body care Combination contouring services The appropriate treatment head, vibration intensity, vacuum level, temperature and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client The system supports customizable massage, recovery and body-care programs. Program 1: Relaxation and Wellness
A comfort-focused vibration program for general body massage and relaxation. Recommended applications: General relaxation Stress-relief programs Tired-muscle massage Maintenance-oriented wellness Recommended for: Spa clients Fatigued professionals First-time clients General wellness programs Program 2: Muscle Recovery
A percussion-focused program for suitable muscle groups and post-workout support. Recommended applications: Back and shoulder massage Thigh and leg treatments Post-workout recovery Localized muscle tension Recommended for: Fitness enthusiasts Athletes Sports-recovery clients Wellness-center members Program 3: Body Shaping Support
A customized vibration program for suitable body-contouring and skin-texture concerns. Recommended applications: Abdomen treatments Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs Cellulite-appearance support Recommended for: Body-contouring studios Beauty salons Aesthetic wellness clinics Clients seeking non-invasive body care Program 4: Vacuum-Heating Body Care
An optional program combining vibration, vacuum suction and controlled heating. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist Thighs Buttocks Upper arms Recommended for: Advanced body-care packages Cellulite-appearance treatments Skin-firming programs Clinics combining multiple contouring technologies Five Massage Heads for Customized Treatments
Five interchangeable heads provide different coverage patterns and massage sensations. The interchangeable heads allow operators to adapt the treatment pattern to the selected body area and client comfort. New clients should begin with a lower vibration intensity before the setting is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The treatment handpiece and interchangeable heads support professional massage across multiple body areas. Upper-Body Treatments
Neck muscles Shoulders Upper back Lower back Upper arms Suitable side-body areas Core and Lower-Body Treatments
Abdomen Waist Thighs Buttocks Lower legs Calves Full-Body Wellness Programs
General relaxation Muscle-recovery support Circulation-focused massage Body-care treatments Post-workout wellness Maintenance-oriented services Professional Wellness and Body-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected head, vibration intensity, optional vacuum and heating settings and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected responses vary between clients. A complete health consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s health history, target areas, muscle condition, comfort level and contraindications. 2. Treatment-Head Selection
The appropriate massage head is selected and installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the attachment is secure. 3. Parameter Selection
Vibration intensity, treatment duration and optional vacuum or heating settings are selected according to the client’s tolerance and professional protocol. 4. Massage Treatment
The operator moves the treatment handpiece across the selected body area using controlled pressure and the recommended technique. A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes per area. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the session, the treatment area is assessed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness, tingling or mild muscle fatigue may occur. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines adjustable vibration with five massage heads and portable professional controls. Key operating advantages include: Vibration and percussion massage Five interchangeable treatment heads Multiple adjustable intensity levels Optional 40K vacuum heating Digital touchscreen or control panel Ergonomic treatment handpiece Portable wheeled design Dual-voltage compatibility Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
The package includes the main machine, treatment handpiece, five massage heads and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Vibration Massage Slimming Machine One professional treatment handpiece One Round Massage Head One Spiked Massage Head One Flat Massage Head One Textured Massage Head One Specialty Massage Head Head-connection components Optional vacuum-heating accessories for the selected model Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-head installation Head-selection guidance Vibration-intensity adjustment Vacuum and heating guidance where applicable Body-area treatment protocols Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup Control-panel operation Treatment-handpiece use Installation of all five massage heads Head selection by body area Vibration-intensity adjustment Optional vacuum operation Optional heating controls Client positioning Professional massage protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital control system Original treatment handpiece Vibration and percussion components Optional vacuum and heating components Handpiece-connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-head installation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of treatment heads and consumable components Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional vibration massage equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active or suspected blood clots Deep-vein thrombosis Severe cardiovascular conditions Severe varicose veins in the treatment area Recent fractures Severe osteoporosis Acute inflammation or fever Open wounds or active infections Recent surgery Herniated discs or severe spinal conditions Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual The device must not be applied directly over the head, front or side of the neck, spine, kidneys, open wounds, acute injuries or other prohibited areas. Optional vacuum and heat settings require additional assessment of skin condition, circulation and heat sensitivity. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Professional spas Wellness clinics Body-contouring studios Fitness and recovery facilities Massage professionals Aesthetic centers Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their wellness services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the Vibration Massage Slimming Machine? Access Five Massage Heads
Five interchangeable heads allow operators to customize treatment coverage and massage sensation for different body areas. Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports professional massage for the arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck muscles and shoulders. Customize Every Session
Adjustable vibration intensity and optional vacuum-heating settings allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The machine supports relaxation, muscle-recovery, body-care, cellulite-appearance and complementary contouring programs. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does vibration massage work?
The machine delivers rapid mechanical vibration and percussion through the selected massage head. Intensity can be adjusted according to the treatment area and client comfort. What are the five massage heads used for?
The Round Head supports general massage, the Spiked Head provides more intensive stimulation, the Flat Head covers larger areas, the Textured Head supports localized massage and the Specialty Head is used for targeted protocols. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the shoulders, back, upper arms, abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, legs and calves. How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes per body area. Treating multiple areas may require additional time. Can the machine be used for relaxation only?
Yes. The system can be used for general muscle relaxation, stress-relief and professional wellness massage without including body-contouring protocols. What is the optional 40K vacuum-heating function?
The optional configuration combines vacuum suction and controlled heating with vibration massage for additional body-care and contour-refinement programs. Can it be combined with other body treatments?
The machine may be incorporated into professionally planned packages with suitable cavitation, RF or body-contouring services. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Vibration intensity is adjustable. Clients should feel controlled mechanical stimulation without pain. Settings should be reduced or treatment stopped if discomfort occurs. Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, treatment heads, intensity settings, optional vacuum heating, body protocols, cleaning and safety. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Professional Vibration Massage to Your Business
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine combines: Adjustable vibration and percussion therapy Five interchangeable massage heads Optional 40K vacuum heating Professional relaxation and body-care applications Three-year parts warranty and customer support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment heads, optional vacuum configuration and professional training. Order Your Vibration Massage Slimming Machine and Request Pricing Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Massage Head
Recommended Application
Round Head
General massage and medium-sized body areas
Spiked Head
More intensive stimulation for suitable muscle groups
Flat Head
Broader coverage for the back, thighs and abdomen
Textured Head
Localized muscle tension and customized massage
Specialty Head
Targeted treatment according to professional protocol
Treatment Area
Applicable Treatment Head
Intended Wellness Application
Neck and shoulders
Round or Textured Head
Muscle-relaxation support
Back
Flat or Round Head
Broad-area massage
Upper arms
Round or Specialty Head
Massage and body-care support
Abdomen
Flat Head
General body-contouring support
Thighs
Flat or Spiked Head
Massage and texture-refinement support
Legs and calves
Round or Textured Head
Tired-muscle relaxation
Buttocks
Flat or Specialty Head
Body-care and massage programs
Localized muscle areas
Textured or Specialty Head
Targeted professional treatment
Specification
Details
Product Name
Vibration Massage Slimming Machine
Product Type
Professional vibration massage and body-wellness system
Primary Technology
Vibration and percussion therapy
Optional Technology
40K vacuum heating
Massage Heads
Five interchangeable heads
Head Types
Round, spiked, flat, textured and specialty
Vibration Intensity
Multiple adjustable levels
Session Duration
Approximately 15–20 minutes per area
Treatment Areas
Arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck and shoulders
Control Interface
Digital touchscreen or control panel
Power Supply
110V and 220V
Design
Ergonomic handpiece with optional wheeled cart
Portability
Lightweight and movable
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, overheat protection and intensity controls
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and customer assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,399.00
Professional EMSlim Body-Sculpting System
Smart Fat Reduction, Muscle Toning, and Skin-Firming Technology
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine is a professional, non-invasive system designed to support fat reduction, muscle development, body contouring, and firmer-looking skin within one treatment platform.
The system combines high-intensity focused electromagnetic technology with radiofrequency energy. Electromagnetic pulses stimulate powerful muscle contractions while controlled RF energy heats the underlying tissue, supporting fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments.
Equipped with four ergonomic applicators, an intelligent touchscreen, and 110V/220V compatibility, the machine is suitable for aesthetic clinics, beauty centers, spas, wellness businesses, gyms, fitness studios, and professional body-contouring providers.
HI-EMT and Radiofrequency | Four Applicators | 20–30-Minute Sessions | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT energy penetrates the treatment area and stimulates repeated supramaximal muscle contractions that cannot normally be maintained through voluntary exercise alone. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle toning Buttock muscle stimulation Arm definition Thigh toning Core-strengthening support Improved muscle conditioning Radiofrequency Fat and Tissue Heating
Controlled radiofrequency energy heats the treatment area while the electromagnetic function stimulates the muscles. This thermal action supports fat-reduction treatments and improves the appearance of skin firmness. Common applications include: Localized fat-reduction support Abdominal contouring Waistline shaping Thigh and arm treatments Skin-firming programs Smoother-looking body contours Combined Body-Contouring Technology
The simultaneous use of electromagnetic muscle stimulation and RF energy allows professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin quality during the same treatment program. Common applications include: Muscle building and definition Fat-reduction support Full-body contouring Buttock toning Improved skin firmness Post-weight-loss body shaping Select the Right Program for Each Client Muscle-Toning Program
A focused treatment program designed to stimulate muscle contractions and improve the appearance of strength, firmness, and definition. Recommended applications: Abdomen, buttocks, arms, and thighs. Recommended for: Clients seeking greater muscle definition and improved body tone without intensive conventional exercise during treatment. Fat-Reduction Program
A professional protocol that combines electromagnetic stimulation with controlled RF heating to support the reduction of localized fat deposits. Recommended applications: Abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks. Recommended for: Clients with stubborn body areas that may not respond sufficiently to diet and exercise alone. Complete Body-Sculpting Program
A combined protocol developed to support muscle tone, fat reduction, skin firmness, and improved body contours during one structured treatment course. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, buttocks and thighs, or other compatible area combinations. Recommended for: Clients seeking comprehensive body-contouring benefits rather than a single-function treatment. Maintenance and Conditioning Program
A follow-up program designed to support previously achieved muscle tone and body-contouring results. Recommended applications: Previously treated areas requiring periodic muscle stimulation or contour maintenance. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial 4–6-session course and want occasional maintenance treatments. Adjustable Electromagnetic and RF Treatment Settings
Energy and RF intensity should begin at a comfortable level and be increased gradually according to the client’s response, treatment area, physical condition, and professional operating protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdomen and waist are common areas for combined muscle-toning and body-contouring treatments. Treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle stimulation Improved core definition Waistline contouring Localized fat-reduction support Firmer-looking abdominal skin Improved midsection shape Arms and Upper-Body Areas
Ergonomic applicators can be positioned on compatible upper-body muscle groups to support toning and definition. Treatment objectives include: Upper-arm toning Biceps and triceps stimulation Improved muscle definition Localized contouring Firmer-looking skin Buttocks and Thigh Areas
The machine supports lower-body programs developed to stimulate the gluteal and thigh muscles while improving body contours. Treatment objectives include: Buttock toning and firming Gluteal muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh contouring Improved lower-body definition Localized fat-reduction support More balanced body proportions Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s goals, medical history, physical condition, previous treatments, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Body and Muscle Assessment
Identify the treatment area, evaluate muscle condition, and determine the appropriate applicator placement and treatment program. Step 3: Applicator Placement
Position and secure the treatment applicators over the selected muscle groups according to the professional operating protocol. Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the treatment time, electromagnetic intensity, and RF level through the intelligent touchscreen. Begin at a comfortable setting and increase the intensity gradually. A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated area, and provide suitable hydration, exercise, nutrition, and maintenance recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine combines professional HI-EMT and RF technology with four applicators and an intelligent control system. Key advantages include: Combined muscle stimulation and RF technology Four ergonomic treatment applicators Muscle toning and fat-reduction support Multiple body-treatment applications Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Structured 4–6-session treatment courses 8-inch intelligent touchscreen Air and water circulation cooling 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Technical Specifications
The stated muscle-contraction equivalent is a product-performance comparison and should not be interpreted as an exact substitute for conventional exercise. Treatment experiences and outcomes vary according to body composition, muscle condition, lifestyle, settings, treatment frequency, and adherence to the recommended course. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine 4 × Ergonomic treatment applicators Compatible applicator straps Standard handle connections 1 × Compatible power cable Standard machine accessories 1 × Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guide Applicator-placement instructions Treatment-protocol guidance Safety and contraindication information Cleaning and maintenance instructions Professional operating training Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional training and technical guidance to help machine owners and treatment providers operate the EMSlim system safely and confidently. Training and support cover: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Applicator positioning HI-EMT energy adjustment RF setting adjustment Treatment-area selection Client consultation procedures Contraindication screening Treatment-course planning Cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting After-sales technical assistance Ongoing support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising during normal professional operation. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair assistance are provided. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting guidance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair instructions Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication during the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information. Provide a detailed explanation of the technical issue. Submit clear photos or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the problem. Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect machine operation Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Operation without the required cooling conditions Water damage or unsuitable storage Failure to follow maintenance instructions Normal wear of straps, cables, connectors, and other consumable components Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. The system should only be operated by trained professionals following the supplied instructions and applicable local regulations. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Severe liver or kidney conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled diabetes Active infection or inflammation Open wounds or damaged skin Recent surgery in the treatment area Severe muscle injuries Abdominal or inguinal hernia Reduced sensation in the treatment area Any medical condition requiring professional clearance Clients with medical conditions or implanted devices should consult a qualified healthcare professional before receiving treatment. Operating Precautions
Complete a consultation before every initial treatment. Inspect the machine, cables, applicators, and cooling system before operation. Position applicators over suitable muscle groups only. Secure each applicator correctly before beginning treatment. Start with a low electromagnetic intensity. Increase energy gradually according to client tolerance. Monitor RF warmth and client comfort throughout the session. Do not place applicators over the head, chest, heart, or injured tissue. Stop treatment if the client experiences pain, dizziness, abnormal discomfort, or skin irritation. Do not exceed the recommended session duration. Maintain sufficient spacing between sessions. Clean and disinfect applicators after every client. Follow the required cooling and maintenance procedures. Use a stable and correctly grounded power source. Maintain appropriate client-treatment records. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Beauty salons Body-contouring centers Medical spas where locally permitted Wellness facilities Gyms and fitness studios Slimming centers Professional muscle-toning providers Entrepreneurs entering the aesthetic-equipment market Users should complete appropriate operating training and comply with local requirements governing electromagnetic, radiofrequency, and body-contouring treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine? 1. Combined HI-EMT and RF Technology
The machine combines powerful muscle stimulation with controlled RF heating, allowing professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin firmness within one treatment program. 2. Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four treatment applicators provide flexible positioning and support efficient single-area or multi-area protocols. 3. Multiple Body Applications
The system supports professional treatments for the abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks. 4. Intelligent Professional Operation
An 8-inch touchscreen, adjustable settings, and air-and-water cooling support convenient use in busy professional environments. 5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates, professional training, ongoing technical assistance, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine work?
The system combines high-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation with radiofrequency energy. HI-EMT stimulates powerful muscle contractions while RF heats the surrounding tissue to support fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments. Q: What is the difference between HI-EMT and RF?
HI-EMT primarily stimulates muscle contractions, while radiofrequency delivers controlled thermal energy to the tissue. Combining them supports muscle toning, body contouring, and skin-firming objectives. Q: What results can the machine support?
The machine supports improved muscle tone, greater body definition, localized fat reduction, firmer-looking skin, and more balanced body contours. Q: Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system works externally and does not require needles, incisions, anesthesia, or surgical procedures. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Clients generally feel strong muscle contractions and controlled warmth. Comfort varies, so intensity should be adjusted gradually and monitored throughout the treatment. Q: How long does one treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A starting course generally includes approximately 4–6 sessions, with around two sessions per week when suitable. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice improved muscle activation or firmness after several sessions. More developed changes generally appear progressively during and after the treatment course. Individual outcomes vary. Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible treatment areas include the abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks. Q: Can multiple areas be treated?
The machine includes four applicators, allowing professionals to create flexible treatment configurations according to the selected protocol and machine controls. Q: Does the machine replace exercise?
EMSlim should complement, not replace, regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, and a healthy lifestyle. Q: Is there any downtime?
Most suitable clients can return to their normal activities after a session. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to post-exercise sensations may occur. Q: Can the machine help build muscle?
HI-EMT technology stimulates repeated muscle contractions and can support improved muscle tone and conditioning through a structured treatment course. Q: Can it reduce fat?
The combined HI-EMT and RF treatment supports localized fat-reduction programs. Outcomes depend on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment settings, and completed course. Q: Does it tighten the skin?
Controlled RF energy can support collagen-related skin-firming treatments and improve the appearance of skin texture. Q: Is the treatment suitable for everyone?
Every client must complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment. Q: Can clients with metal implants receive treatment?
Clients with metal implants in or near the treatment area should not receive treatment without clearance from a qualified healthcare professional. Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility. Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Training includes machine setup, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cleaning, and maintenance guidance. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Add Professional EMSlim Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine provides clinics, salons, wellness centers, and fitness businesses with a professional solution for muscle toning, fat-reduction support, body contouring, and skin firming. Five key benefits: Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology Four ergonomic applicators Efficient 20–30-minute treatment sessions Multiple body-treatment applications CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
HI-EMT Energy
Adjustable electromagnetic intensity
Allows muscle stimulation to be adapted to the treatment area and client tolerance
RF Energy
Adjustable controlled tissue heating
Supports fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Enables flexible single-area or multi-area treatment
Treatment Time
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Supports efficient professional appointment scheduling
Treatment Course
Approximately 4–6 sessions
Provides a structured program for progressive results
Session Frequency
Approximately two sessions per week
Supports consistent muscle stimulation and body contouring
Control Interface
8-inch intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient treatment selection and adjustment
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports temperature management during professional operation
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Enables operation in different international markets
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Abdominal Muscle Toning
Abdomen
Stimulate abdominal muscles and improve definition
Waistline Contouring
Waist and sides
Support a slimmer and more balanced waistline
Buttock Toning
Buttocks
Stimulate gluteal muscles and improve firmness
Thigh Sculpting
Inner and outer thighs
Improve muscle tone and lower-body contours
Arm Definition
Upper arms
Support biceps and triceps conditioning
Localized Fat Reduction
Compatible body areas
Support the reduction of stubborn fat deposits
Skin-Firming Treatment
Abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Improve the appearance of skin firmness
Muscle Conditioning
Selected muscle groups
Support strength, tone, and muscle activation
Post-Weight-Loss Contouring
Abdomen, thighs, arms, and buttocks
Improve body shape and muscle definition
Maintenance Treatment
Previously treated areas
Help maintain muscle tone and contouring results
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine
Machine Power
6500W
Magnetic Field Strength
14 Tesla
RF Function
Yes, built-in radiofrequency
Net Weight
Approximately 57 kg
Machine Dimensions
60 × 40 × 65 cm
Display
8-inch intelligent touchscreen
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology and Radiofrequency
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Primary Functions
Fat reduction, muscle building, muscle toning, skin firming, and body contouring
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 4–6 sessions
Recommended Frequency
Approximately two sessions per week
Muscle Contractions
Claimed equivalent of up to 30,000 crunches or squats per session
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,599.00
Professional Four-Handle HIEMT PRO Body-Sculpting System
Dual-Client Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Multi-Area Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO is a professional body-sculpting system developed for simultaneous muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
Advanced High-Intensity Electromagnetic Technology produces approximately 30,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute session. Its four-handle configuration supports multi-area treatment for one client or simultaneous treatment for two suitable clients.
With adjustable energy settings, an 8-inch intelligent touchscreen, dual-client operation, and combined air-and-water cooling, the PRO system is designed for premium clinics, medical spas, body-sculpting studios, fitness centers, resort spas, and high-volume wellness facilities.
Advanced HIEMT | Four ergonomic handles | Dual-client operation | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HIEMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing powerful involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Professional fitness treatments
Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy, treatment objectives, and selected protocol.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Arms and abdomen treatments
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
-
Customized four-area programs
Dual-Client Operation
The four-handle configuration can be arranged to treat one client across multiple areas or two suitable clients simultaneously.
Common benefits include:
-
Single-client multi-area treatments
-
Simultaneous dual-client sessions
-
Flexible applicator allocation
-
Improved treatment-room efficiency
-
Customized treatment programs
-
High-volume clinic operation
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Midsection definition
-
Waistline sculpting
-
General abdominal programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for bilateral lower-body treatment.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs
Multi-Area Body Program
Uses all four applicators for one client across multiple suitable treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Abdomen and arms
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Customized four-area treatment
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking comprehensive body conditioning
-
Clients with multiple treatment objectives
-
Premium body-sculpting clients
Dual-Client Program
Divides the four applicators between two appropriately screened clients.
Recommended applications:
-
Two-client abdomen programs
-
Simultaneous lower-body treatments
-
Independent client protocols
-
High-volume treatment scheduling
-
Professional dual-client services
Recommended for:
-
Clinics with appropriate staffing
-
High-volume body-sculpting facilities
-
Premium spas and wellness centers
Each client must receive an individual consultation, screening, treatment plan, applicator placement, and continuous professional monitoring.
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO allows practitioners to customize treatments according to the selected body areas, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | Advanced HIEMT | Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Treatment Handles | Four | Multi-area or dual-client treatments |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Treatment Capacity | One or two suitable clients | Flexible professional operation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Four to six sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
Multiple handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
-
Multi-zone midsection treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
The applicators support balanced lower-body treatments across suitable buttock and thigh muscle groups.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body sculpting
Arms and Multiple Body Areas
Four handles allow professionals to create customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Simultaneous arm and abdomen treatment
-
Simultaneous thigh and buttock treatment
-
Customized multi-area programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Two or more handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Targeted or combined placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral handle placement |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Bilateral treatment |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh definition and muscle stimulation | Bilateral treatment |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Bilateral treatment |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Up to four handles |
| Dual Clients | Simultaneous independent treatment programs | Handles divided between two clients |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review each client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. During dual-client operation, each client must receive individually assessed applicator placement.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with conservative energy levels. Adjust the settings according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response.
Step 4: HIEMT Treatment
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor every client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO combines multi-area and dual-client performance with professional controls and continuous-operation cooling.
Key advantages include:
-
Advanced HIEMT technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment handles
-
Approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Single-client multi-area capability
-
Simultaneous dual-client capability
-
Focused and bilateral treatment configurations
-
Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
8-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Four- to six-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO |
| Machine Power | 6500W |
| Magnetic Field Strength | 14 Tesla |
| RF Function | Yes, built-in radiofrequency |
| Net Weight | Approximately 57 kg |
| Machine Dimensions | 60 × 40 × 65 cm |
| Display | 8-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Designation | PRO professional configuration |
| Technology | High-Intensity Electromagnetic Technology |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 |
| Treatment Capacity | One client across multiple areas or two suitable clients |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, simultaneous, bilateral, or dual-client |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Four to six sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Results Timeline | Supplied estimate: visible changes in 2–4 weeks and progressive changes over 6–12 weeks |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures and timelines are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO main unit
-
4 × Ergonomic HIEMT treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
8-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Single-client multi-area protocols
-
Dual-client treatment guidance
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Single-client multi-area operation
-
Dual-client treatment setup
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Multi-client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review must be completed for every client before treatment. The system should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Complete separate screening for every client.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with conservative energy levels.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Continuously monitor every client during dual-client operation.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Premium body-sculpting clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Luxury wellness facilities
-
Resort spas
-
Aesthetic salons
-
Fitness centers
-
Slimming centers
-
High-volume treatment facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, staffing, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIEMT or dual-client treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO?
Advanced HIEMT Technology
The system provides approximately 30,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session.
Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four handles support focused, bilateral, multi-area, and suitable dual-client treatment programs.
Flexible Dual-Client Operation
The applicators can be divided between two appropriately screened clients, providing additional scheduling flexibility for high-volume facilities.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The 8-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes machine training, dual-client guidance, applicator-placement protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO?
It is a professional HIEMT body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation, multi-area body conditioning, and suitable dual-client operation.
What does the PRO designation mean?
PRO identifies this product as the supplied advanced four-handle configuration with approximately 30,000 contractions, an 8-inch touchscreen, dual-client capability, and air-and-water cooling.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes four ergonomic HIEMT treatment handles.
Can all four handles be used on one client?
Yes. All four handles can be positioned across suitable treatment areas according to the client’s individual treatment plan.
Can two clients be treated simultaneously?
Yes. The four handles can be divided between two suitable clients. Each client requires individual screening, settings, applicator placement, documentation, and continuous monitoring.
Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
How long does one session take?
A standard session takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur.
Can HIEMT replace regular exercise?
HIEMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
The supplied information indicates that visible changes may begin within two to four weeks and continue developing over six to twelve weeks. Individual results vary.
What performance figures are supplied?
The supplied product information lists potential muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The system uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, multi-handle placement, dual-client protocols, energy adjustment, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Advanced Dual-Client HIEMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO enables premium clinics, resort spas, wellness centers, and body-sculpting professionals to provide multi-area or simultaneous dual-client muscle-conditioning treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
Advanced HIEMT with approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Four ergonomic handles for multi-area treatment
-
Flexible single-client or dual-client operation
-
An 8-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model.
Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,499.00
Professional 10-in-1 80K Cavitation and Vacuum RF System
Multi-Technology Body Contouring with a Complete Treatment Kit
The 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine is a multifunctional body-contouring platform developed for beauty salons, medical spas, aesthetic clinics and professional body-sculpting studios.
The system combines 80K ultrasonic cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, lipolaser plates and Inner Ball Roller vibration massage. Its comprehensive accessory kit includes seven professional handles, five massage heads, eight lipolaser plates and 29 vacuum cups.
Multiple technologies and applicator sizes allow trained practitioners to create customized programs for the abdomen, waist, thighs, upper arms, back, hips, legs and suitable face and neck areas.
Ten treatment functions | 80K cavitation | 29 vacuum cups | Three-year warranty
Five Core Technologies on One Professional Platform 80K Ultrasonic Cavitation
The 80K Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable body areas for professional non-invasive contour-refinement programs. Common applications include: Abdomen treatments Waist and flank programs Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs Hip and back treatments General body-contouring services Vacuum RF Therapy
The Vacuum RF function combines controlled suction with radiofrequency energy. Common applications include: Cellulite-appearance programs Skin-firming support Circulation-focused body care Vacuum massage Body-contour refinement General aesthetic treatments Multipolar RF
Multipolar RF delivers controlled thermal energy for professional skin-firming and texture-refinement programs. Common applications include: Loose-looking body skin Skin-firming support Texture-improvement programs Abdomen and thigh treatments Suitable facial protocols General rejuvenation services Lipolaser Plates
Eight lipolaser plates support professionally planned, multi-area body-contouring programs. Common applications include: Abdomen Waist and flanks Thighs Upper arms Back and hips Simultaneous multi-area treatments Inner Ball Roller Massage
The Inner Ball Roller provides controlled mechanical massage and vibration across selected body areas. Common applications include: Circulation-focused massage Temporary water-retention support Cellulite-appearance programs Muscle relaxation Post-treatment massage General body wellness The appropriate technology, applicator, energy setting, vacuum level and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client The system supports customized body-contouring pathways using one or more treatment technologies. Program 1: Abdomen and Waist Contouring
A body-focused program for suitable localized areas around the abdomen and waist. Recommended technologies: 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Multipolar RF Lipolaser Plates Inner Ball Roller Recommended for: Abdomen treatments Waist-contour refinement Flank programs Professional body-sculpting services Program 2: Thigh and Cellulite Appearance
A lower-body program designed for suitable inner- and outer-thigh concerns. Recommended technologies: Vacuum RF Multipolar RF Inner Ball Roller 80K Cavitation Lipolaser Plates Recommended for: Inner thighs Outer thighs Cellulite-appearance programs Lower-body contouring Program 3: Arms, Back and Hips
A customizable program for smaller or contoured body areas. Recommended technologies: Suitable Cavitation Handle Vacuum Cups Multipolar RF Lipolaser Plates Roller Massage Recommended for: Upper arms Upper and lower back Bra-line areas Hips and flanks Program 4: Face and Neck Firming
A gentler professional program using only applicators and settings approved for facial and neck areas. Recommended technologies: Suitable small RF Handle Appropriate Vacuum Cups Gentle Roller Massage Customized low-intensity settings Recommended for: Facial-contour refinement Jawline treatments Suitable neck areas Professional skin-firming services Complete Accessory Kit for Customized Treatments
The machine includes multiple handles, heads, plates and cups for different treatment areas. The range of applicators allows trained operators to select a suitable size and shape for each treatment zone. New clients should begin with conservative energy, vacuum and temperature settings before the intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The system supports professional treatments across multiple body and facial zones. Upper-Body Treatments
Upper arms Upper back Lower back Bra-line areas Waist Flanks Lower-Body Treatments
Abdomen Hips Buttocks Inner thighs Outer thighs Legs Face and Neck Treatments
Suitable cheek areas Jawline Lower face Appropriate neck areas Other professionally assessed facial zones Professional Body and Facial Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected technology, handle, cup, plate, energy setting and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, treatment goals, body composition, target areas and contraindications. 2. Technology and Applicator Selection
The appropriate treatment handles, massage heads, vacuum cups and lipolaser plates are selected according to the treatment plan. 3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the cavitation energy, RF level, vacuum pressure, massage intensity and session duration according to client tolerance and professional protocol. 4. Multi-Technology Treatment
The selected technologies are applied in the appropriate sequence. A complete professional session generally lasts approximately 60–90 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the areas are assessed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness, bruising, tingling or sensitivity may occur, particularly after vacuum treatments. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The machine combines multiple contouring technologies with an extensive accessory kit for streamlined professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Ten integrated treatment functions 80K ultrasonic cavitation Vacuum RF and Multipolar RF Eight lipolaser plates Inner Ball Roller massage Seven professional handles Five massage heads Twenty-nine vacuum cups Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system and a comprehensive selection of professional treatment accessories. Standard Equipment
One 10-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF main unit Seven professional treatment handles One 80K Cavitation Handle Vacuum RF treatment components Multipolar RF Handles Inner Ball Roller Handle Five massage heads Eight lipolaser plates Twenty-nine vacuum cups Handle and cup connection components Lipolaser cables and accessories Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup Cavitation operation RF parameter selection Vacuum-cup selection Lipolaser-plate placement Inner Ball Roller operation Body and facial treatment protocols Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup Control-interface operation Installation of all treatment handles 80K Cavitation operation RF-energy adjustment Vacuum-pressure selection Selection of the 29 vacuum cups Lipolaser-plate placement Inner Ball Roller operation Multi-technology treatment sequencing Client consultation Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital control interface Cavitation-generation components RF and vacuum components Original treatment handles Lipolaser plates Handle and cable connections Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect handle, cup or plate operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of cups, membranes and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional cavitation, RF, vacuum and lipolaser equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Active or suspected blood clots Severe cardiovascular conditions Severe varicose veins Open wounds or active skin infections Severe liver or kidney conditions Uncontrolled diabetes Bleeding disorders Recent surgery Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Cavitation must not be applied over the head, heart, breasts, kidneys, liver, reproductive organs, bone surfaces or other prohibited areas. RF, vacuum and lipolaser settings must be adjusted according to the treatment area, skin condition and client tolerance. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Professional spas Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Body-contouring studios Wellness centers Trained independent practitioners Qualified aesthetic professionals Businesses expanding their body-contouring services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine? Combine Multiple Technologies
The system combines cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, lipolaser and Inner Ball Roller massage in one professional platform. Access a Complete Treatment Kit
Seven handles, five massage heads, eight lipolaser plates and 29 vacuum cups support a wide range of professional protocols. Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports treatments for the abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back, hips, legs and suitable facial and neck areas. Customize Every Session
Multiple technologies, applicator sizes and adjustable settings allow treatments to be adapted to client condition and professional objectives. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
What technologies are included?
The system combines 80K Ultrasonic Cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, lipolaser plates, Inner Ball Roller massage and additional integrated treatment functions. What is 80K cavitation?
The 80K Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy for professionally planned body-contouring programs on suitable localized areas. Why are 29 vacuum cups included?
Different body and facial areas require different cup sizes and shapes. The selection allows practitioners to choose an appropriate cup for each treatment zone. How many lipolaser plates are included?
The system includes eight lipolaser plates for professionally planned multi-area treatments. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, thighs, upper arms, back, hips, buttocks, legs and selected face or neck areas. How long does a treatment take?
A complete multi-technology session generally lasts approximately 60–90 minutes. The duration depends on the number of areas and technologies selected. How many sessions are recommended?
The treatment course should be customized according to the client’s condition and objectives. Professional programs commonly include multiple sessions with appropriate intervals. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Client sensation varies by technology. Cavitation may produce an audible tone, RF creates warmth, vacuum produces suction and the Roller Handle provides mechanical massage. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, warmth, bruising, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. Is professional training included?
Professional training covers all treatment handles, vacuum cups, lipolaser plates, technology sequencing, safety, cleaning and maintenance. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Multi-Technology Body Contouring to Your Business
The 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine combines: 80K ultrasonic cavitation Vacuum RF and Multipolar RF Eight lipolaser plates Seven handles, five massage heads and 29 vacuum cups Three-year parts warranty and professional support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its technologies, accessories and professional training. Order Your 10-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine and Request Pricing Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Accessory Category
Quantity
Recommended Application
Professional Treatment Handles
7
Cavitation, RF, Vacuum RF, Roller and additional functions
Massage Heads
5
Customized mechanical massage
Lipolaser Plates
8
Simultaneous multi-area body programs
Vacuum Cups
29
Different body, face and neck areas
Inner Ball Roller
1 system
Massage and circulation-focused body care
Treatment Area
Applicable Technology
Intended Aesthetic Application
Abdomen
Cavitation, RF and Lipolaser
Body-contour refinement
Waist and flanks
Cavitation and Vacuum RF
Waist-contouring support
Thighs
Vacuum RF and Roller
Cellulite-appearance and texture care
Upper arms
Cavitation, RF or Lipolaser
Targeted body-care programs
Back
Vacuum RF and Lipolaser
Localized contour refinement
Hips and buttocks
RF and Roller
Firming and texture support
Face and jawline
Suitable RF and Vacuum Applicators
Facial-contour programs
Neck
Suitable RF Handle
Professional firming support
Specification
Details
Product Name
10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine
Product Type
Professional multifunctional body-contouring system
Primary Technologies
80K Cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, Lipolaser and Roller Massage
Cavitation Frequency
80KHz
Treatment Handles
Seven
Massage Heads
Five
Lipolaser Plates
Eight
Vacuum Cups
Twenty-nine
Treatment Duration
Approximately 60–90 minutes
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back, hips, legs, face and neck
Control Interface
Professional touchscreen or digital control panel
Power Supply
110V and 220V
Design
Professional wheeled trolley system
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring, overload protection and adjustable intensity
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and customer assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$699.00
Professional Vibration Slimming in a Compact, Portable Design
The Wikbeauty Portable G5 Vibration Massager brings the power of high-frequency vibration body sculpting to a compact desktop unit that weighs just 4.5 kg. It delivers deep, rhythmic vibration through five interchangeable massage heads to soften stubborn fat, smooth cellulite, boost circulation and melt away muscle tension — anywhere you need it.
Set it on a treatment trolley, a side table or a shelf. It is ideal for home users, mobile therapists, small studios and salons that want professional G5 results without a floor-standing machine.
Portable 4.5 kg design | 5 massage heads | Up to 4000rpm | Timer and speed control | Three-year warranty
Why Go Portable?
- Lightweight: just 4.5 kg, easy to carry between rooms or to home visits
- Space-saving: compact desktop unit that fits any treatment room or home
- Same G5 power: full 800–4000rpm vibration range and all five massage heads
- Quick setup: plug in, attach a head and start in seconds
- Great value: professional body sculpting at an entry-level price
Product Highlights
- High-frequency physical vibration massage
- Five specially shaped, interchangeable massage heads
- Electronic speed control from 800 to 4000rpm
- Timer and frequency adjustment knobs
- Body slimming, shaping and cellulite reduction
- Boosts blood circulation and lymphatic flow
- Relieves muscle fatigue, stiffness and tension
- Smooths rough, uneven skin
- Quiet operation (≤60dB)
- ABS and stainless steel construction
- Available in 110V and 220V
- 3-year warranty support
What It Does for Your Body
- Slims and shapes: deep vibration softens and breaks down stubborn fat on the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs.
- Reduces cellulite: smooths dimpled skin on the hips, buttocks and legs.
- Boosts circulation: stimulates blood flow and lymphatic drainage for a lighter feeling body.
- Calms the nerves: rhythmic massage relaxes body and mind.
- Balances the body: supports endocrine balance and overall wellbeing.
- Melts muscle fatigue: eases soreness after long work days and workouts.
- Refines skin: smooths rough, wrinkled skin for a firmer look.
Five Interchangeable Massage Heads
| Head | Best for | Suggested speed |
|---|---|---|
| Columna head | Works like a masseur's fingers to soften hard fat and relieve pain | 2400–4000rpm |
| Sponge head | Gentle acupoint massage over the whole body, including the soles | 800rpm |
| Bow-shaped head | Follows body curves for acupoint massage, including the soles | 800rpm |
| Dots head | Rough, wrinkled skin and soft fat — smooths skin and dissolves fat | 1600–2400rpm |
| Semispheres head | Large muscle areas like the back — removes fatigue, loosens joints, burns fat | 2400–4000rpm |
Tip: place a piece of disposable film over the skin when using the sponge or bow-shaped head for a hygienic session.
Treatment Areas
- Neck and shoulders
- Arms
- Abdomen and waist
- Buttocks
- Thighs and legs
- Back and full body
Perfect For
- Home users who want salon-style body sculpting
- Mobile massage therapists and home-visit beauticians
- Small studios and treatment rooms with limited space
- Office workers who sit at a desk all day
- New moms getting back into shape after giving birth
- Athletes who want faster muscle recovery
- People with poor lymphatic flow
How to Use
- Place the unit on a stable table or trolley and plug it in.
- Attach the massage head for the area and result you want.
- Set the session time with the timer knob.
- Set the vibration speed with the frequency knob.
- Hold the handpiece by its grip and glide it slowly over the treatment area, keeping the hose in a smooth curve.
- Switch heads to move between fat softening, skin smoothing and muscle relief.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | Wikbeauty Portable G5 Vibration Massager |
| Model | G5 Portable |
| Type | Desktop / portable |
| Technology | High-frequency physical vibration |
| Power | 100W |
| Voltage | AC 110V / 220V, 50–60Hz |
| Vibration speed | 800–4000rpm, adjustable |
| Controls | Timer and frequency knobs, LED indicator |
| Massage heads | 5 (columna, sponge, bow-shaped, dots, semispheres) |
| Working noise | ≤60dB |
| Material | ABS and stainless steel |
| Color | White |
| Package size | 60 × 41 × 17 cm |
| Gross weight | 4.5 kg |
| Treatment areas | Neck, arms, abdomen, buttocks, legs, full body |
| Plug options | US / UK / EU / AU |
| Warranty | 3-year warranty support |
Package Contents
- 1x Portable G5 main unit
- 1x Handpiece with hose
- 5x Massage heads
- 1x Power cord
- 1x English user manual
Warranty and Support
Wikbeauty provides 3-year warranty support, including free spare parts, video technical support and installation training. Technical support is available for setup, operation, troubleshooting and routine maintenance questions.
Safety Information
Do not use over open wounds, inflamed skin, varicose veins or recent injuries. People who are pregnant, have a pacemaker, blood clots or a diagnosed medical condition should consult a healthcare professional before use. Avoid bending the hose sharply or holding the handpiece by the hose.
Frequently Asked Questions
How is the portable G5 different from the standing G5?
It offers the same vibration power, speed range and five massage heads in a compact 4.5 kg desktop unit, with no floor stand. It is easier to carry, store and use at home or on the go.
Is it suitable for home use?
Yes. It is simple to operate and compact enough for any home.
Can I take it to clients' homes?
Yes. At 4.5 kg it is easy to carry, making it ideal for mobile therapists.
Which head should I start with?
Start with the columna head at 2400–4000rpm for fat softening, or the sponge head at 800rpm for gentle relaxation.
Is it noisy?
No. It runs quietly at 60dB or less.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes 3-year warranty support with free spare parts, video technical support and installation training.
Order the Wikbeauty Portable G5 Vibration Massager
Get professional vibration slimming, cellulite care and muscle relief in a lightweight machine you can use anywhere.
Select the required voltage and plug type and order today.
Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model.
Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
From $599.00
High-Frequency Vibration Massage for Body Slimming and Shaping
The Wikbeauty G5 Vibration Body Massager Slimming Machine delivers powerful, high-frequency physical vibration massage for body slimming, shaping and cellulite reduction. With five specially shaped massage heads, electronic speed control up to 4000rpm and a sturdy mobile caster stand, it is a versatile, easy-to-use machine for salons, spas, physiotherapy studios and home use.
The deep vibration softens stubborn fat, smooths uneven skin, boosts blood circulation and relieves muscle fatigue across the neck, arms, abdomen, buttocks and legs.
5 massage heads | Up to 4000rpm | Timer and speed control | Mobile caster stand | Three-year warranty
Product Highlights
- High-frequency physical vibration massage
- Five specially shaped, interchangeable massage heads
- Electronic speed control from 800 to 4000rpm
- Built-in timer and frequency adjustment knobs
- Body slimming, shaping and cellulite reduction
- Boosts blood circulation and lymphatic flow
- Relieves muscle fatigue and tension
- Sturdy mobile stand with caster wheels and placement tray
- Quiet operation (≤60dB)
- ABS and stainless steel construction
- Available in 110V and 220V
- 3-year warranty support
Key Benefits
- Body slimming and shaping: softens and breaks down stubborn fat for a slimmer, more contoured body.
- Cellulite reduction: smooths dimpled, uneven skin on the thighs, buttocks and arms.
- Blood circulation: deep vibration stimulates blood flow and lymphatic drainage.
- Soothing the nervous system: rhythmic massage relaxes the body and mind.
- Regulating endocrine balance: supports overall body balance and wellbeing.
- Removing muscle fatigue: relieves soreness, stiffness and tension after work or exercise.
- Skin smoothing: refines rough, wrinkled skin for a firmer look.
Five Specially Shaped Massage Heads
1. Columna Massage Head
Acts like a masseur's fingers. The vibration from its pointed tips softens hard fat and relieves pain.
Suggested speed: 2400–4000rpm
2. Sponge Massage Head
A gentle head for the acupuncture points of the whole body, including the soles of the feet.
Suggested speed: 800rpm
3. Bow-Shaped Massage Head
Designed to follow the body's curves, ideal for the acupuncture points of the whole body, including the soles.
Suggested speed: 800rpm
4. Dots Massage Head
Targets rough, wrinkled skin and soft fat. It works on both the epidermis and the deep fiber tissue, dissolving fat and smoothing wrinkles.
Suggested speed: 1600–2400rpm
5. Semispheres Massage Head
For large muscle areas such as the back. It drives the muscles through passive exercise, removing muscle fatigue, making the joints more flexible and burning fat.
Suggested speed: 2400–4000rpm
Treatment Areas
- Neck
- Arms
- Abdomen
- Buttocks
- Legs
- Back and full body
Suitable For
- Office workers who spend long hours sitting at a desk
- New moms who want to get back into shape after giving birth
- People with middle-age or postpartum weight gain
- Individuals with poor lymphatic flow
- Athletes who want to reduce muscle soreness and speed up recovery
- Busy people who want to enjoy the benefits of massage therapy
Easy, Convenient Operation
- Attach the massage head that suits the treatment area.
- Set the treatment time with the timing knob.
- Set the vibration speed with the frequency knob.
- Hold the handle by the grip and glide the head over the treatment area, keeping the hose in a smooth curve.
- Switch heads to move between fat softening, skin smoothing and muscle relief.
- Store the heads in the placement tray after use.
For the sponge and bow-shaped heads, a piece of disposable film over the treatment area keeps the session hygienic.
Product Introduction
- Indicator light — shows the machine is running
- Timing adjustment — sets the session length
- Frequency adjustment — sets the vibration speed
- Massage heads — five interchangeable heads
- Hose — flexible connection to the handpiece
- Placement tray — keeps heads organised
- Pedestal — stable base with caster wheels
- Power interface — CE-marked power socket
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | Wikbeauty G5 Vibration Body Massager Slimming Machine |
| Model | G5 |
| Technology | High-frequency physical vibration |
| Power | 100W |
| Voltage | AC 110V / 220V, 50–60Hz |
| Vibration speed | 800–4000rpm, adjustable |
| Controls | Timer, frequency adjustment, LED indicator |
| Massage heads | 5 (columna, sponge, bow-shaped, dots, semispheres) |
| Working noise | ≤60dB |
| Material | ABS and stainless steel |
| Color | White |
| Machine size | 34.5 × 34 × 94 cm |
| Net weight | 16 kg |
| Packaging size | 101 × 43 × 40 cm |
| Treatment areas | Neck, arms, abdomen, buttocks, legs, full body |
| Plug options | US / UK / EU / AU |
| Warranty | 3-year warranty support |
Package Contents
- 1x Main machine
- 1x Handpiece (probe) with hose
- 5x Massage heads
- 1x Support frame
- 1x Pedestal with caster wheels
- 1x Placement tray
- 1x Power cord
- 1x English user manual
- 1x Plum screwdriver
- 1x Wrench
- 11x Screws
- 4x Gaskets
Warranty and Support
Wikbeauty provides 3-year warranty support, including free spare parts, video technical support and installation training. Technical support is available for setup, operation, troubleshooting and routine maintenance questions.
Safety Information
Do not use over open wounds, inflamed skin, varicose veins or recent injuries. Clients who are pregnant, have a pacemaker, blood clots or a diagnosed medical condition should consult a healthcare professional before use. Avoid bending the hose sharply or holding the handpiece by the hose.
Frequently Asked Questions
What does the G5 vibration machine do?
It uses high-frequency vibration to soften fat, reduce cellulite, smooth the skin, boost circulation and relieve muscle fatigue for a slimmer, more shaped body.
Which massage head should I use?
Use the columna or semispheres head at 2400–4000rpm for fat and large muscles, the dots head at 1600–2400rpm for skin smoothing, and the sponge or bow-shaped head at 800rpm for gentle acupoint massage.
Which areas can be treated?
Neck, arms, abdomen, buttocks, legs, back and the full body.
Is it noisy?
No. The machine runs quietly at 60dB or less.
Can it be moved between rooms?
Yes. The sturdy stand rolls on caster wheels.
Can it be used at home?
Yes. It is easy to operate and suitable for home use as well as salons, spas and studios.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes 3-year warranty support with free spare parts, video technical support and installation training.
Order the Wikbeauty G5 Vibration Body Massager Slimming Machine
Add powerful vibration slimming, cellulite and muscle-relief treatments to your services with one affordable, easy-to-use machine.
Select the required voltage and plug type and order today.
Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model.
Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$1,299.00
7-in-1 40K Cavitation Vacuum RF Body Sculpting Machine
The Wikbeauty 7-in-1 40K Cavitation Vacuum RF Body Sculpting Machine is a multifunctional professional beauty system designed for non-invasive body contouring, skin firming, cellulite appearance improvement, and facial and body massage.
Combining 40K ultrasonic cavitation, vacuum suction, radiofrequency (RF) technology, and a specialized meridian massage handpiece, this all-in-one machine allows beauty salons, spas, and aesthetic professionals to provide multiple cosmetic treatments using a single system.
Equipped with seven interchangeable handpieces, an intuitive touchscreen interface, and adjustable treatment settings, the machine offers a practical solution for expanding professional body sculpting and skincare services.
Key Features and Benefits
-
7-in-1 Multifunctional Technology: Integrates 40K ultrasonic cavitation, vacuum massage, radiofrequency skin firming, and mechanical body massage.
-
40K Ultrasonic Cavitation: Designed for non-invasive body contouring treatments targeting localized areas of unwanted fullness.
-
Vacuum Massage Technology: Provides adjustable suction-based massage for facial and body treatments, supporting temporary improvements in skin texture and cellulite appearance.
-
Radiofrequency Skin Firming: Uses controlled RF energy to support cosmetic skin tightening and improve the appearance of mild skin laxity.
-
Seven Specialized Handpieces: Includes attachments for facial care, body contouring, RF treatments, and massage.
-
Interactive Touchscreen: Features a clear graphical interface with accessible treatment modes and adjustable parameters.
-
Versatile Treatment Applications: Suitable for the abdomen, waist, thighs, hips, arms, and approved facial treatment areas.
-
Professional Salon Design: Combines multiple treatment functions in a compact tabletop system.
-
3-Year Warranty: Includes a three-year warranty for added purchasing confidence and long-term equipment support.
How Does the 7-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine Work?
The machine combines ultrasonic energy, vacuum suction, radiofrequency heating, and mechanical massage to address different cosmetic body-contouring and skincare needs.
Each treatment handpiece performs a specific function, allowing professionals to select the appropriate technology and treatment area.
1. 40K Ultrasonic Cavitation for Body Contouring
The 40K cavitation handpiece operates at a nominal ultrasonic frequency of 40 kHz.
Ultrasonic cavitation uses acoustic energy to generate mechanical effects within treated tissue. In aesthetic body-contouring systems, this technology is applied to selected areas of localized body fullness.
Common treatment areas:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist and flanks
-
Thighs
-
Hips
-
Other approved body areas
Potential benefits:
-
Supports non-invasive body-contouring treatments
-
Targets the cosmetic appearance of localized body fullness
-
Complements professional body sculpting programs
-
Provides an alternative to invasive body-contouring procedures for appropriate cosmetic goals
Individual outcomes depend on treatment parameters, client characteristics, and the treatment protocol. Cavitation is not intended for general weight loss or obesity treatment.
2. Facial Vacuum Handpiece for Gentle Skin Massage
The dedicated facial vacuum handpiece uses controlled suction to provide localized massage of the skin and superficial soft tissue.
Its smaller treatment head supports facial applications that require greater precision than larger body massage attachments.
Main applications:
-
Facial suction massage
-
Cosmetic skin-conditioning treatments
-
Temporary improvement in the appearance of skin
-
Professional facial wellness services
Vacuum intensity should be selected according to skin sensitivity and treatment-area requirements. Excessive suction may cause irritation or bruising.
3. Body and Face Vacuum Handpiece for Versatile Massage
The multipurpose vacuum handpiece provides suction-based massage for selected facial and body areas.
Its treatment-head configuration allows beauty professionals to incorporate vacuum massage into a variety of cosmetic procedures.
Potential applications:
-
Localized facial and body massage
-
Cosmetic skin-texture care
-
Body wellness treatments
-
Supplementary massage in body-contouring programs
Controlled suction creates a lifting and releasing action against the skin surface. Application pressure and treatment duration should be adjusted according to the approved operating protocol.
4. Body Vacuum Handpiece for Body Contouring Massage
The larger body vacuum handpiece is intended for suction massage across broader body regions.
Vacuum massage is frequently used in professional beauty services focused on the temporary appearance of cellulite and uneven skin texture.
Common treatment areas:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist
-
Thighs
-
Buttocks
-
Hips
Potential benefits:
-
Supports cosmetic body massage
-
May temporarily improve the visible appearance of uneven skin texture
-
Complements cellulite appearance treatments
-
Provides efficient coverage of larger body areas
The body vacuum handpiece can be incorporated into treatment menus alongside other compatible cosmetic technologies.
5. RF Body and Face Handpiece for Localized Skin Firming
The RF body and face handpiece uses radiofrequency energy to generate controlled heating within the treated tissue.
Radiofrequency technology is widely used in professional aesthetic equipment for cosmetic skin-firming treatments.
Controlled heating can support temporary tissue contraction and may improve the appearance of skin firmness and texture, depending on the device settings and treatment protocol.
Common applications:
-
Facial skin-firming treatments
-
Localized body skin care
-
Cosmetic improvement in mild skin laxity
-
Skin-texture treatments
The compact multipolar attachment is designed for controlled application to selected facial and body regions.
6. RF Body Handpiece for Larger-Area Skin Firming
The RF body handpiece is designed for cosmetic radiofrequency treatments across selected body areas.
It provides an additional treatment-head configuration for professionals offering body skin-firming services.
Common treatment areas:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist
-
Thighs
-
Upper arms
-
Other approved body areas
Potential benefits:
-
Supports cosmetic body skin firming
-
Addresses the appearance of mild skin laxity
-
Complements body-contouring services
-
Supports improvements in the appearance of skin texture
RF treatments should follow approved energy settings and operating procedures to avoid excessive heating or burns.
7. Meridian Massage Brush for Body Wellness
The meridian massage brush features multiple rounded metal contact points designed for mechanical body massage.
This attachment can be incorporated into professional body-care routines as a complementary massage accessory.
Main applications:
-
Body surface massage
-
Cosmetic wellness treatments
-
Localized soft-tissue massage
-
Relaxation-focused body-care services
The brush provides a different massage experience from the vacuum and RF handpieces, adding variety to professional spa treatment menus.
Seven Interchangeable Treatment Handpieces
The machine includes seven specialized handpieces for different cosmetic applications.
| Handpiece | Technology | Primary Application |
|---|---|---|
| 40K Cavitation | Ultrasonic cavitation | Body contouring |
| Vacuum (Face) | Vacuum suction | Facial massage |
| Vacuum (Body & Face) | Vacuum suction | Facial and body massage |
| Vacuum (Body) | Vacuum suction | Body massage and cellulite appearance care |
| RF (Body & Face) | Radiofrequency | Localized facial and body skin firming |
| RF (Body) | Radiofrequency | Body skin-firming treatments |
| Meridian Massage Brush | Mechanical massage | Body wellness and relaxation massage |
The variety of handpieces allows professionals to customize their cosmetic treatment menus while maintaining a single equipment platform.
Intelligent Touchscreen Control System
The Wikbeauty 7-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine features an interactive touchscreen interface designed for professional salon operation.
The angled display provides convenient access to treatment modes and operating parameters.
Clear Graphical Interface
The touchscreen uses graphical treatment-head icons and visual controls to help operators identify and select available functions.
Adjustable Treatment Parameters
The interface provides controls for treatment settings, including applicable energy, suction, and timing parameters.
Settings should be selected according to the treatment mode, body area, and recommended operating procedure.
Real-Time Operating Display
The control screen presents relevant treatment information during operation, allowing professionals to monitor selected settings.
Practical Touchscreen Layout
Large on-screen buttons and a high-contrast interface support convenient navigation and parameter adjustment.
English and Chinese Language Options
The system supports English and Chinese interface languages for accessible professional operation.
Professional Treatment Applications
Body Contouring and Sculpting
The 40K cavitation technology can be incorporated into non-invasive cosmetic body-contouring programs for appropriate clients.
It is commonly applied to body regions such as the abdomen, waist, and thighs.
Cellulite Appearance Care
Vacuum massage can complement aesthetic treatments designed to temporarily improve the visible appearance of cellulite and uneven skin texture.
Facial Skin Firming
The facial-compatible RF handpiece provides a radiofrequency option for selected cosmetic facial skin-firming applications.
Body Skin Tightening
RF body treatments can be used in cosmetic programs focused on the appearance of skin firmness and mild laxity.
Facial and Body Massage
The different vacuum handpieces accommodate localized and broader-area massage services.
Body Wellness Treatments
The meridian massage brush provides an additional mechanical massage option for professional spa and wellness routines.
How to Use the 7-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine
Step 1: Client Consultation
Assess the client's cosmetic treatment goals, skin condition, medical history, and potential contraindications.
Determine whether the selected treatment is appropriate for the client.
Step 2: Select the Treatment Handpiece
Choose the appropriate handpiece based on the intended treatment and approved application area.
Step 3: Prepare the Treatment Area
Clean the skin and apply the appropriate coupling gel or conductive medium when required by the selected technology.
Step 4: Adjust the Treatment Settings
Select the treatment function using the touchscreen interface.
Configure the relevant operating parameters according to the treatment protocol.
Step 5: Perform the Treatment
Apply the selected handpiece using the recommended professional technique.
Maintain appropriate skin contact and movement where required, while monitoring skin response and client comfort.
Step 6: Post-Treatment Care
Assess the treated area and provide appropriate aftercare instructions.
Document the session and any relevant observations.
Step 7: Clean the Equipment
Clean and disinfect the handpieces using approved procedures.
Inspect the attachments and cables before subsequent treatments.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Brand | Wikbeauty |
| Product Type | 7-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF Body Sculpting Machine |
| Main Technologies | Ultrasonic Cavitation, Vacuum Suction, Radiofrequency, Mechanical Massage |
| Number of Handpieces | 7 |
| Ultrasonic Cavitation Frequency | 40 kHz |
| Rated Power | 120 W |
| Voltage | 200–240 V AC |
| Frequency | 50–60 Hz |
| Machine Dimensions | 54.5 × 34 × 34.5 cm |
| Control System | Touchscreen |
| Interface Languages | English and Chinese |
| Treatment Areas | Face and body, depending on handpiece |
| Intended Users | Trained beauty and aesthetic professionals |
| Recommended Environment | Beauty Salons, Spas, Aesthetic Studios |
| Warranty | 3 Years |
Package Includes
The Wikbeauty 7-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine comes with seven interchangeable treatment handpieces.
| Item | Quantity |
|---|---|
| Main Machine | 1 |
| 40K Cavitation Handpiece | 1 |
| Facial Vacuum Handpiece | 1 |
| Body and Face Vacuum Handpiece | 1 |
| Body Vacuum Handpiece | 1 |
| Body and Face RF Handpiece | 1 |
| Body RF Handpiece | 1 |
| Meridian Massage Brush | 1 |
Three-Year Warranty and Professional Support
Wikbeauty provides a 3-year warranty for the 7-in-1 40K Cavitation Vacuum RF Body Sculpting Machine, giving salon owners and beauty professionals added confidence when investing in professional aesthetic equipment.
3-Year Equipment Warranty
The machine includes a three-year warranty, subject to the applicable warranty terms and conditions.
Technical Assistance
Wikbeauty can assist customers with equipment-related questions, operating guidance, and technical troubleshooting through its customer support channels.
Professional Equipment Guidance
Customers can contact Wikbeauty for assistance with machine functions, handpiece identification, operating considerations, and general maintenance questions.
Long-Term Equipment Care
Routine cleaning, proper storage, and recommended maintenance help support consistent machine operation and long-term performance.
Safety Precautions and Contraindications
The 7-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine is intended for professional cosmetic use by appropriately trained operators.
Treatment suitability depends on individual medical history, the selected technology, the intended treatment area, and applicable operating instructions.
Clients requiring additional screening or who may not be suitable for certain treatments include those with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Pacemakers or other active electronic implants
-
Metal implants within the intended treatment region
-
Active skin infections or open wounds
-
Cancer or ongoing cancer treatment
-
Significant cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders or anticoagulant use
-
Severe skin sensitivity or impaired sensation
-
Recent surgery in the intended treatment area
-
Conditions that may be aggravated by heat, ultrasound, suction, or massage
Important operating precautions:
-
Use each handpiece only on approved treatment areas.
-
Follow recommended operating parameters and treatment procedures.
-
Avoid excessive suction or prolonged RF exposure.
-
Monitor skin response and client comfort during treatment.
-
Do not apply ultrasound or RF energy over prohibited anatomical structures.
-
Clean and maintain the equipment according to professional hygiene requirements.
-
Seek appropriate medical guidance when a client has an uncertain contraindication.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty 7-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine?
Multiple Treatments in One System
The combination of seven handpieces allows beauty professionals to offer several cosmetic treatment categories using a single equipment platform.
Suitable for Face and Body Care
Dedicated facial, body, and multipurpose attachments provide flexibility across approved treatment areas.
Efficient Salon Equipment Investment
A multifunctional system can reduce the need for multiple separate devices, helping salon owners organize their equipment and treatment-room space.
User-Friendly Touchscreen
An intuitive graphical interface makes treatment-mode selection and parameter adjustments more convenient for trained operators.
Flexible Professional Treatment Menus
The machine supports a range of cosmetic services, including body contouring, skin firming, suction massage, and body wellness care.
Three-Year Warranty
The included 3-year warranty provides additional reassurance for businesses purchasing professional aesthetic equipment.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is a 7-in-1 cavitation vacuum RF machine?
A 7-in-1 cavitation vacuum RF machine is a professional aesthetic system combining multiple cosmetic technologies through seven interchangeable treatment handpieces. These include ultrasonic cavitation, vacuum suction, radiofrequency, and mechanical massage.
What is 40K cavitation used for?
40K ultrasonic cavitation is used in certain non-invasive cosmetic body-contouring treatments for localized areas of unwanted fullness. It is not intended for obesity treatment or general weight loss.
Can this machine be used on both the face and body?
Yes. The system includes handpieces designated for facial use, body use, and combined facial and body applications. Each attachment should only be used on the areas approved for that specific function.
What is the difference between 40K cavitation and radiofrequency?
40K cavitation uses ultrasonic energy for selected body-contouring applications.
Radiofrequency technology uses controlled heating for cosmetic skin-firming treatments and improvements in the appearance of skin texture.
The two technologies serve different cosmetic purposes.
Can this machine remove cellulite permanently?
No cosmetic treatment should be assumed to eliminate cellulite permanently. Vacuum massage and certain aesthetic procedures may temporarily improve its visible appearance, but results vary.
Does the machine help with skin tightening?
The RF handpieces are designed for professional cosmetic skin-firming applications. The degree and duration of visible improvement depend on client characteristics, treatment settings, and the protocol used.
How many handpieces are included?
The machine includes seven handpieces: one 40K cavitation head, three vacuum attachments, two RF attachments, and one meridian massage brush.
What is the purpose of the meridian massage brush?
The meridian massage brush is a mechanical massage attachment designed for body wellness, surface massage, and relaxation-oriented spa treatments.
Is the machine suitable for professional beauty salons?
Yes. The machine is designed for trained beauty and aesthetic professionals operating in salons, spas, and similar professional environments.
What voltage does the machine use?
The standard specification is 200–240 V AC, 50–60 Hz. Customers should verify compatibility with their local electrical supply before purchase.
Does the machine come with a warranty?
Yes. Wikbeauty provides a 3-year warranty for the machine, subject to the applicable warranty terms and conditions.
Does the machine require professional training?
Yes. Appropriate training is recommended to understand treatment selection, parameter adjustment, contraindications, equipment maintenance, and safe operating techniques.
Upgrade Your Body Contouring Services with Wikbeauty
The Wikbeauty 7-in-1 40K Cavitation Vacuum RF Body Sculpting Machine combines multiple professional cosmetic technologies in one versatile system.
Featuring seven specialized handpieces, touchscreen operation, facial and body treatment options, and a 3-year warranty, it provides a practical equipment solution for beauty salons, spas, and aesthetic professionals looking to expand their service offerings.
Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model.
Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$2,399.00
Professional 2-in-1 Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation and Roller Massage System
Dual-Function Technology for Muscle Stimulation and Body Massage
The Wikbeauty 2-in-1 Muscle Stimulation and Inner Roller System combines high-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation with mechanical roller massage in one professional platform.
Two electromagnetic applicators support controlled muscle-contraction programs, while two Inner Ball Roller handles provide mechanical massage for selected body areas.
A 10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen and four dedicated handles allow trained operators to create separate muscle-stimulation and massage services using one system.
Two technologies | Four treatment handles | 10.4-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies in One System
Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
The system includes two electromagnetic applicators designed to stimulate repeated muscle contractions.
According to the supplied specification, the system provides a peak magnetic-field output of up to 14 Tesla at the applicator.
Potential professional applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle-stimulation programs
-
Buttock muscle-stimulation programs
-
Selected thigh applications
-
Selected arm applications
-
Muscle-tone and firmness programs
-
Professionally supervised body-sculpting services
Magnetic-field strength decreases with distance from the applicator. The 14 T figure should not be interpreted as meaning that 14 T reaches every tissue within the stated 18 cm range.
Inner Ball Roller Massage
The system includes two mechanical Inner Ball Roller handles.
These handles provide controlled rolling massage over selected body areas and may support:
-
Professional body massage
-
Temporary improvement in cellulite appearance
-
Temporary improvement in the appearance of uneven skin texture
-
Relaxation of suitable soft-tissue areas
-
Body-contouring massage programs
-
Pre- or post-treatment massage where appropriate
Mechanical roller massage does not permanently break up cellulite deposits, remove fat or guarantee skin tightening.
Four Dedicated Treatment Handles
The system includes:
-
Two electromagnetic muscle-stimulation applicators
-
Two Inner Ball Roller massage handles
Each handle type has a separate purpose.
| Handle type | Quantity | Primary function |
|---|---|---|
| Electromagnetic applicator | 2 | Controlled muscle stimulation |
| Inner Ball Roller handle | 2 | Mechanical rolling massage |
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
A changing magnetic field can induce electrical activity in nearby nerves and muscles.
This stimulation produces repeated involuntary muscle contractions within the selected area.
Clients may experience:
-
Strong muscle contractions
-
Pulsing or tapping sensations
-
Muscle fatigue
-
Temporary soreness
-
Temporary cramping
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation may support a firmer or more toned appearance, but results differ between individuals and may require ongoing sessions to maintain.
Understanding the 14-Tesla Specification
The supplied product information lists:
-
Peak magnetic-field output: up to 14 T
-
Manufacturer-stated maximum reach: up to 18 cm
The 14 T figure refers to peak output at or near the treatment applicator. Magnetic-field intensity decreases as distance from the applicator increases.
Treatment response depends on:
-
Applicator placement
-
Distance from the applicator
-
Selected energy level
-
Pulse parameters
-
Treatment duration
-
Target anatomy
-
Individual client response
Mechanical Inner Roller Massage
The Inner Ball Roller handle applies controlled mechanical pressure and movement to the skin and underlying soft tissue.
Mechanical massage may temporarily affect the appearance of cellulite by:
-
Redistributing superficial fluid
-
Providing temporary tissue compression
-
Supporting massage-related circulation
-
Temporarily smoothing the appearance of uneven skin
The roller should not be used with excessive pressure or over areas with contraindications.
Professional Body Applications The machine should not be used over the head, chest, heart, genitals or other prohibited anatomical areas. Build Two Professional Service Categories Muscle-Tone Programs
Use the electromagnetic applicators for professionally supervised sessions focused on the abdomen, buttocks or other approved muscle groups. Roller Massage Programs
Use the Inner Ball Roller handles for massage and temporary improvement in the appearance of cellulite or uneven skin texture. Combination Body Programs
Qualified operators may include both technologies within a structured body-service plan where appropriate. The two technologies should not automatically be applied simultaneously or described as producing guaranteed combined results. Maintenance Services
Because aesthetic outcomes may be temporary, some clients may choose periodic maintenance sessions based on their individual response. Claims That Should Not Be Made
This system should not be advertised as guaranteeing: Permanent muscle growth Permanent cellulite removal Fat-cell destruction Weight loss Treatment of obesity Tightening of all loose skin Treatment of osteoarthritis Treatment of spinal disorders Accelerated surgical recovery Cure of chronic pain Healing of sports injuries Permanent circulation improvement Results equivalent to exercise Safety for every client How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s goals, medical history, implanted devices, previous surgery and contraindications. 2. Technology Selection
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation, roller massage or a professionally justified sequence is selected. 3. Treatment-Area Assessment
The operator confirms that the area has sufficient healthy tissue and is suitable for the selected handle. 4. Applicator Placement
Electromagnetic applicators are secured over the approved muscle group, or the roller handle is prepared for manual application. 5. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the available intensity, treatment mode and session time according to the client’s condition and tolerance. 6. Controlled Treatment
Client comfort, muscle response, applicator position and skin condition are monitored throughout the session. 7. Post-Treatment Review
The treatment area is assessed, and suitable aftercare guidance is provided. Temporary muscle soreness, cramping, tenderness, redness or bruising may occur. Technical Specifications
Package dimensions should not be presented as the installed machine dimensions unless confirmed separately. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One 2-in-1 touchscreen control system Power cable suitable for the selected market Required handle-connection components Electromagnetic Accessories
Two electromagnetic muscle-stimulation applicators Applicator straps or positioning accessories Flexible support components, where included Roller Massage Accessories
Two Inner Ball Roller handles Handle connection cables Required massage accessories Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance Electromagnetic applicator training Roller massage training Client-screening guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: Machine installation Touchscreen navigation Electromagnetic applicator placement Treatment-area selection Intensity adjustment Roller handle operation Appropriate massage pressure Client screening Treatment monitoring Cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional aesthetic, physiotherapy or medical qualifications required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 2-in-1 Muscle Stimulation and Roller System is supported by a three-year limited warranty. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Touchscreen Original electromagnetic applicators Original Inner Ball Roller handles Handle connectors Flexible support components Other eligible original parts Roller surfaces, straps and other consumable or wear components may have separate coverage terms. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Damage caused by dropping a handle Improper cleaning or storage Excessive pressure applied to roller components Normal strap or roller wear Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. Electromagnetic Treatment Contraindications
Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist clearance for clients with: Pacemakers Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators Neurostimulators Medication pumps Cochlear implants Other active electronic implants Metal implants in or near the treatment field Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active cancer Recent surgery in the treatment area Significant cardiovascular conditions Uncontrolled seizure disorders Other contraindications listed in the manual Roller Massage Contraindications
Roller massage may be unsuitable over areas with: Open wounds Active infection Significant inflammation Varicose veins Thrombosis or suspected blood clots Bleeding disorders Fragile or damaged skin Recent surgery Unexplained swelling Pressure or vibration urticaria Other contraindications listed in the manual General Precautions Remove phones, watches, cards and metallic objects from the magnetic treatment field. Do not position magnetic applicators over the head, chest, heart or prohibited areas. Monitor strong muscle contractions carefully. Do not leave clients unattended during high-intensity treatment. Clean roller handles between clients. Stop treatment if unusual pain, dizziness, numbness or skin injury occurs. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained when suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The 2-in-1 system is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Body-contouring studios Fitness and wellness centers with qualified operators Appropriately trained independent practitioners The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose This 2-in-1 System? Two Complementary Technologies
Combine electromagnetic muscle stimulation and mechanical roller massage within one professional platform. Four Dedicated Handles
Two magnetic applicators and two roller handles support flexible body-treatment workflows. Dual-Area Muscle Stimulation
The two electromagnetic applicators can support treatment of two approved areas according to the selected protocol. Professional Roller Massage
The Inner Ball Roller handles provide controlled mechanical massage and may temporarily improve cellulite appearance. High-Intensity Magnetic Output
The system provides a manufacturer-stated peak output of up to 14 T at the applicator. Universal Voltage
AC 100–240 V compatibility supports installation across multiple international markets. Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training, remote assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What makes this a 2-in-1 system?
The machine combines electromagnetic muscle stimulation with mechanical Inner Ball Roller massage. Do the roller handles deliver 14 T magnetic energy?
The supplied information does not clearly establish that the roller handles deliver magnetic energy. The 14 T specification should be applied to the electromagnetic applicators unless the technical documentation states otherwise. Can electromagnetic stimulation build muscle?
Repeated magnetic stimulation can produce muscle contractions and may improve muscle tone or firmness. Results vary. Can both technologies be used during one appointment?
A qualified operator may include both technologies in a structured plan when appropriate. Simultaneous use should only occur if permitted by the operating instructions. Is the treatment painless?
Electromagnetic stimulation causes strong muscle contractions and may lead to soreness or cramping. Roller massage may cause pressure, tenderness or bruising. Can clients remain clothed?
Electromagnetic treatment may be delivered through suitable non-metallic clothing. Roller massage generally requires direct access to the selected body area according to the treatment protocol. Is training included?
Yes. Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Consumables, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. Expand Your Body-Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty 2-in-1 System combines: Two electromagnetic muscle-stimulation applicators Two Inner Ball Roller massage handles A 10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen Up to 14 T peak magnetic output International voltage compatibility Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local requirements. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment area
Electromagnetic stimulation
Roller massage
Abdomen
Suitable according to protocol
Suitable
Buttocks
Suitable according to protocol
Suitable
Thighs
Suitable according to protocol
Suitable
Upper arms
Selected protocols
Suitable
Flanks
Limited muscle application
Suitable
Back
Only approved muscle areas
Suitable soft-tissue areas
Calves
Selected protocols
Suitable with screening
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 2-in-1 body-treatment system
Machine Power
6500W
Magnetic Field Strength
14 Tesla
RF Function
Yes, built-in radiofrequency
Net Weight
Approximately 40 kg
Machine Dimensions
63 × 61 × 51 cm
Display
10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen
Included technologies
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation and mechanical roller massage
Total treatment handles
Four
Electromagnetic applicators
Two
Inner Ball Roller handles
Two
Manufacturer-stated maximum reach
Up to 18 cm
Input voltage
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Package dimensions
66 × 60 × 49 cm
Typical session setting
Approximately 10–20 minutes per area, protocol dependent
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Support
Remote technical support and professional training
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System
Twelve Programs and Six Specialized Tips for Customized Skin Care
The WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System is a professional facial platform developed for premium skin-care studios, medical spas, dermatology clinics and luxury beauty centers.
The system combines water-based hydrodermabrasion, booster-serum infusion and facial lymphatic-drainage support. Twelve customizable treatment programs and six interchangeable tips allow practitioners to create personalized protocols for different skin concerns.
Its gesture-control functionality, premium glass components, adjustable treatment settings and compatible booster solutions support efficient professional operation and a premium client experience.
Hydrodermabrasion | Twelve treatment programs | Six specialized tips | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Elite Facial Platform Hydrodermabrasion
The Hydrodermabrasion function combines controlled liquid flow, suction and gentle exfoliation for professional cleansing and hydration. Common applications include: Deep facial cleansing Surface exfoliation Skin hydration Pore-care programs Removal of loosened debris General facial rejuvenation Booster Serum Infusion
The system supports compatible booster serums for customized professional skin-care programs. Common applications include: Hydration treatments Brightening programs Anti-aging skin care Acne-prone skin care Soothing treatments Firming support Facial Lymphatic-Drainage Support
The facial massage and drainage function supports professionally planned treatments for temporary puffiness and facial contour refinement. Common applications include: Facial massage Puffiness-focused treatments Circulation-support programs Facial-contour care Relaxation services Post-cleansing facial protocols Gesture-Control Operation
The smart operating interface includes gesture-control functionality for convenient hands-free adjustment during suitable treatment steps. Common operating applications include: Treatment-program selection Intensity adjustment Improved workflow Reduced contact with controls Efficient treatment transitions Greater focus on the client The appropriate program, treatment tip, booster serum, pressure and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, sensitivity and professional protocol. Select the Right Facial Program for Each Client
The system provides 12 customizable programs. Practitioners can select an appropriate pathway according to the client’s skin condition and treatment objective. Program 1: Deep Cleansing and Clarity
A cleansing-focused pathway for congested, oily or dull-looking skin. Recommended applications: Deep facial cleansing Surface exfoliation Pore-care programs Removal of excess oil and debris Recommended for: Congested-looking skin Oily-skin programs Dull complexion Professional cleansing facials Program 2: Hydration and Glow
A moisture-focused pathway designed to support refreshed and radiant-looking skin. Recommended applications: Deep hydration Dry-looking skin Dull complexion General skin conditioning Recommended for: Dehydrated-looking skin Hydration facial packages Brightening services Maintenance-oriented treatments Program 3: Anti-Aging and Firming
A rejuvenation pathway for mature-looking skin, fine lines and elasticity concerns. Recommended applications: Fine-line appearance Firming support Mature-looking skin Facial-contour care Recommended for: Professional anti-aging services Mature-skin programs Firming treatments Premium rejuvenation packages Program 4: Sensitive and Soothing Care
A gentler pathway for suitable sensitive-looking or temporarily reactive skin. Recommended applications: Gentle cleansing Skin-comfort treatments Temporary redness Soothing hydration Recommended for: Sensitive-looking skin First-time clients Comfort-focused facials Gentle maintenance programs Twelve Programs for Customized Facial Treatments
The Elite Hydrodermabrasion System provides 12 customizable programs for different professional skin-care objectives. The available settings give trained operators greater flexibility over treatment intensity, pressure, solution selection and treatment duration. New clients should begin with gentler settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually. Six Specialized Treatment Tips
Six interchangeable tips support different facial zones and professional treatment objectives. Cleansing Tips
General facial cleansing Surface exfoliation Pore-care treatments Removal of loosened debris Facial-treatment preparation Hydration Tips
Moisture-focused facials Booster-serum application Dry-looking skin General skin conditioning Brightening protocols Targeted Treatment Tips Nose and T-zone Chin and jawline Cheeks Forehead Other professionally assessed facial zones Professional Facial and Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected program, tip, solution, booster serum and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Facial Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, treatment history, current products, allergies, sensitivity and contraindications. 2. System Preparation
The appropriate treatment tip, cleansing solution and booster serum are selected. Bottles, tubing and treatment components are connected according to the operating manual. 3. Program Selection
The practitioner selects one of the 12 programs and adjusts the available pressure, intensity and treatment-duration settings. 4. Hydrodermabrasion Treatment
The selected tip is moved across the treatment area using the recommended technique. Booster infusion and facial drainage steps are incorporated according to the customized protocol. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and suitable moisturizer and sunscreen are applied where appropriate. The client receives customized aftercare instructions. A typical professional session lasts approximately 30–50 minutes. Temporary redness, dryness or sensitivity may occur. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines advanced hydrodermabrasion, booster infusion and gesture-control functionality for streamlined professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Twelve customizable treatment programs Six interchangeable treatment tips Four included cleansing solutions Multiple booster-serum options Gesture-control functionality Facial lymphatic-drainage support Premium glass components Modern professional design Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main hydrodermabrasion system, six treatment tips, four cleansing solutions and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Elite Hydrodermabrasion main unit Six interchangeable treatment tips Hydrodermabrasion handpiece Facial massage and drainage components Solution and booster containers Illuminated waste bottle Required tubing and connection components Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Included Cleansing Solutions
Essence Foam WikBeauty Cleansing Solution Softening, Hydrate and Glow Serum Rejuvenating Extract Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine setup guidance Treatment-tip installation Program-selection guidance Pressure and intensity adjustment Cleansing-solution guidance Booster-serum selection Gesture-control operation Facial-treatment protocols Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Treatment-handpiece operation Tip selection and installation Operation of all 12 programs Pressure and intensity adjustment Cleansing-solution selection Booster-serum selection Gesture-control functionality Facial lymphatic-drainage protocols Client consultation Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Smart control system Gesture-control components Internal pumps Original treatment handpiece Handle and tubing connections Other eligible components supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-tip operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of tips, tubing, filters and consumables Damage caused by incompatible solutions Blockages caused by incorrect cleaning Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional facial equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete skin consultation, allergy review and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Active herpes simplex Open wounds or active skin infections Severe inflammatory acne Severe rosacea aggravated by treatment Recent surgery Recent laser treatment or chemical peel Active skin cancer or suspicious lesions Known allergy to selected solutions or boosters Severe sensitivity Reduced skin sensation Pregnancy without appropriate professional guidance Other contraindications listed in the operating manual A patch test should be performed before using a new booster serum when appropriate. Pressure, exfoliation intensity, booster selection and treatment duration must be adjusted according to the client’s skin condition and tolerance. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Premium skin-care studios Medical spas Dermatology clinics Luxury beauty centers Aesthetic clinics Professional facial specialists Estheticians Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their hydrodermabrasion services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion System? Combine Three Professional Functions
The system combines hydrodermabrasion, booster-serum infusion and facial lymphatic-drainage support in one professional platform. Create Customized Facial Treatments
Twelve programs, six specialized tips and multiple booster-serum options support individualized facial protocols. Improve Professional Workflow
Gesture-control functionality allows practitioners to adjust suitable settings while maintaining focus on the client and treatment process. Expand Your Service Menu
The system supports cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, brightening, acne-care, sensitive-skin and facial-contour programs. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does hydrodermabrasion work?
Hydrodermabrasion combines controlled liquid flow, suction and gentle exfoliation to cleanse the skin and support hydration. How is this system different from basic hydrodermabrasion machines?
The Elite system combines hydrodermabrasion with customizable booster-serum infusion, facial lymphatic-drainage support, 12 treatment programs, six specialized tips and gesture-control functionality. What solutions are included?
The system includes Essence Foam, WikBeauty Cleansing Solution, Softening, Hydrate and Glow Serum and Rejuvenating Extract. What booster options are available?
Available booster categories include brightening, anti-aging, hydration, acne care, soothing and firming. How long does a professional treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–50 minutes. Duration depends on the selected program, booster and customized protocol. Can treatments be customized?
Yes. Practitioners can select from 12 programs, six tips and multiple booster options according to the client’s skin condition and goals. Is the system suitable for sensitive skin?
Gentler programs, appropriate tips and suitable soothing products can be selected for some sensitive-skin clients. A professional assessment is still required. What is gesture control?
Gesture control allows practitioners to perform certain program or setting adjustments without directly touching the control interface. Is professional training included?
Remote professional training covers machine setup, program selection, treatment-tip use, booster selection, gesture control, facial protocols, cleaning and safety. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Elite Hydrodermabrasion to Your Facial Business
The WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System combines: Advanced water-based hydrodermabrasion Twelve customizable treatment programs Six specialized treatment tips Booster infusion and lymphatic-drainage support Three-year parts warranty and professional training Contact Wikbeauty to order the Elite system or receive more information about its treatment programs, booster solutions and package contents. Order Your Elite Hydrodermabrasion System and Request Pricing Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Program Category
Recommended Application
Cleansing Programs
Surface cleansing, exfoliation and pore-care support
Hydration Programs
Moisture-focused treatments and skin conditioning
Brightening Programs
Dull-looking skin and complexion enhancement
Anti-Aging Programs
Fine-line appearance and firming support
Acne-Care Programs
Suitable congested and acne-prone skin
Sensitive-Skin Programs
Gentle cleansing, hydration and comfort-focused care
Lymphatic Programs
Facial massage and temporary puffiness support
Customized Programs
Treatment-specific settings selected by the practitioner
Skin Concern
Applicable Program
Intended Skin-Care Application
Congested-looking skin
Cleansing program
Deep-cleansing and pore-care support
Dry or dehydrated-looking skin
Hydration program
Moisture-focused facial care
Fine-line appearance
Anti-aging program
Rejuvenation and firming support
Dull-looking complexion
Brightening program
Complexion-enhancement treatments
Uneven-looking tone
Brightening booster program
Tone-refinement support
Acne-prone skin
Acne-care program
Clarifying skin-care services
Sensitive-looking skin
Gentle program
Soothing and comfort-focused care
Temporary facial puffiness
Lymphatic program
Facial massage and contour support
Specification
Details
Product Name
WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System
Product Type
Professional hydrodermabrasion and booster-infusion system
Primary Technologies
Hydrodermabrasion, booster infusion and lymphatic-drainage support
Treatment Programs
12 customizable programs
Specialized Tips
Six interchangeable tips
Control System
Smart operating system with gesture control
Included Solutions
Four professional cleansing and treatment solutions
Booster Options
Brightening, anti-aging, hydration, acne care, soothing and firming
Session Duration
Approximately 30–50 minutes
Construction
Premium glass and durable professional materials
Display Features
Illuminated waste bottle and treatment interface
Power Supply
Regional professional AC power configuration
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, pressure regulation and temperature monitoring
Research and Development
More than 15 years of WikBeauty development experience
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and technical assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional 15-in-1 Hydro Dermabrasion System
Its 500W maximum power, 14-inch touchscreen, adjustable 0–100KPa vacuum pressure and intelligent software interface allow practitioners to create customized facial programs based on the client’s skin-analysis results.
Fifteen technologies | 14-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Fifteen Technologies on One Professional Platform Skin Analyzer
The integrated skin analyzer uses white, polarized and ultraviolet light to capture images of the skin under different viewing conditions. Common analysis applications include: Visible skin-condition review Oiliness assessment Hydration-related observations Pigmentation appearance Pore visibility Texture assessment Before-and-after comparison Hydro Dermabrasion
Hydro Dermabrasion combines controlled suction, liquid flow and compatible solutions for professional cleansing, exfoliation and hydration. Common applications include: Deep facial cleansing Surface exfoliation Pore-care treatments Skin hydration Oil and debris removal General facial rejuvenation Tripolar RF
The Tripolar RF Handle delivers controlled radiofrequency energy for professional skin-firming and rejuvenation programs. Common applications include: Skin-firming support Fine-line appearance Mature-looking skin Facial rejuvenation Elasticity-focused treatments General anti-aging protocols Diamond Dermabrasion
Diamond Dermabrasion provides controlled mechanical exfoliation with interchangeable diamond tips. Common applications include: Surface skin polishing Uneven-looking texture Rough-looking skin Dull complexion Facial preparation Professional exfoliation Bipolar RF
The Bipolar RF Handle provides controlled radiofrequency energy for suitable facial areas and professional firming programs. Common applications include: Facial-toning support Skin-firming treatments Fine-line appearance Contour-refinement programs Mature-skin services Customized facial treatments Facial Ultrasound
The Facial Ultrasound Handle supports professional facial massage and cosmetic-product application. Common applications include: Product-application support Facial massage Hydration treatments General rejuvenation Skin-conditioning programs Customized facial services Eye Ultrasound
The Eye Ultrasound Handle is designed for appropriate professional treatments around suitable eye-area zones. Common applications include: Under-eye skin care Eye-area massage Puffiness-focused programs Fine-line appearance Product-application support Delicate-area treatments Oxygen Spray Gun
The Oxygen Spray Gun produces a fine liquid mist for hydration and cosmetic-solution application. Common applications include: Skin hydration Cooling and refreshing Facial-solution application Dull-looking complexion Post-cleansing care General skin conditioning Six-Color PDT Light Therapy
The PDT Handle provides six selectable LED color modes for different professional skin-care programs. Available colors include: Red Blue Green Yellow Purple Orange Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber
The Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber supports professional surface cleansing and exfoliation. Common applications include: Pore cleansing Surface exfoliation Removal of loosened debris Skin-care preparation Oily-skin programs General facial cleansing High-Frequency Handle
The High-Frequency Handle supports suitable professional acne-care and clarifying protocols. Common applications include: Acne-prone skin Oily-skin programs Post-extraction care Clarifying treatments Facial skin conditioning General spa services Vacuum Pen
The Vacuum Pen provides targeted suction for suitable facial areas. Common applications include: Pore-care treatments Blackhead-extraction support Congested-looking skin T-zone cleansing Localized vacuum treatments Professional facial preparation Magic Bubble Pen
The Magic Bubble Pen provides a foaming facial-cleansing treatment for suitable skin types. Common applications include: Deep-cleansing programs Oily-looking skin Pore-care treatments Facial preparation General skin purification Professional cleansing services Ice Hammer
The Ice Hammer provides controlled cooling for post-treatment comfort and calming protocols. Common applications include: Cooling after facial treatments Temporary redness Skin-comfort programs Post-extraction care Pore-care finishing steps Facial-treatment completion Nutrient Infusion
The Nutrient Infusion function supports professional application of compatible cosmetic serums and solutions. Common applications include: Hydration support Brightening programs Skin-conditioning treatments Post-cleansing care Customized facial protocols Maintenance treatments The appropriate technology, products, settings and treatment duration should be selected according to the client’s skin-analysis results, sensitivity and professional assessment. Select the Right Facial Program for Each Client
The system supports customized facial pathways using the skin analyzer and one or more treatment technologies. Program 1: Congestion and Acne-Prone Skin
A cleansing-focused program for suitable oily, congested and acne-prone skin. Recommended technologies: Skin Analyzer Hydro Dermabrasion Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber High-Frequency Handle Blue PDT Light Oxygen Spray Gun Recommended for: Congested-looking skin Oily-skin programs Acne-prone skin care Professional pore-cleansing services Program 2: Anti-Aging and Firming
A rejuvenation program for mature-looking skin, fine lines and elasticity concerns. Recommended technologies: Skin Analyzer Hydro Dermabrasion Tripolar RF Bipolar RF Red PDT Light Nutrient Infusion Recommended for: Mature-looking skin Fine-line appearance Skin-firming programs Professional anti-aging services Program 3: Brightening and Pigmentation Care
A customized program for dull-looking complexions and uneven-looking skin tone. Recommended technologies: Skin Analyzer Diamond Dermabrasion Facial Ultrasound Green or Yellow PDT Light Oxygen Spray Gun Nutrient Infusion Recommended for: Dull-looking skin Uneven-looking tone Brightening facials Complexion-refinement programs Program 4: Eye-Area and Sensitive-Skin Care
A gentler program for suitable under-eye areas and sensitive-looking skin. Recommended technologies: Skin Analyzer Eye Ultrasound Gentle LED mode Ice Hammer Nutrient Infusion Recommended for: Under-eye skin care Puffiness-focused programs Sensitive-looking skin Comfort-focused treatment The Hydro Dermabrasion System provides adjustable vacuum pressure from 0 to 100KPa. Lower Vacuum Settings
Sensitive skin Delicate facial areas First-time clients Gentle hydration protocols Comfort-focused treatments Moderate Vacuum Settings
General Hydro Dermabrasion Surface cleansing Pore-care programs Normal skin types Professional maintenance facials Higher Vacuum Settings
Appropriately selected congested areas Thicker skin zones Targeted vacuum treatments Professional extraction support Customized advanced protocols Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Smart Facial Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s skin concerns, treatment history, current products, sensitivities and contraindications. 3. Customized Program Selection
The practitioner reviews the analysis and selects the appropriate technologies, products, vacuum pressure, RF settings, light modes and treatment sequence. 4. Professional Facial Treatment
The selected facial technologies are applied according to the customized protocol. A complete session generally lasts approximately 30–60 minutes or longer for advanced programs. 5. Results Review and Aftercare
Post-treatment images may be captured for comparison. The skin is assessed, and the client receives suitable home-care and aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, dryness, sensitivity, tingling or mild swelling may occur depending on the selected technologies. Designed for Advanced Professional Environments
The system combines intelligent skin analysis with 15 facial technologies for streamlined professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Tri-spectral skin imaging Intelligent analysis software Fifteen professional treatment technologies Six-color PDT light therapy 14-inch touchscreen Adjustable 0–100KPa vacuum Maximum 500W power Modern vertical design with mobility wheels Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, Skin Analyzer, professional facial handles and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One 15-in-1 Hydro Dermabrasion main unit Hydro Dermabrasion Handle Tripolar RF Handle Diamond Dermabrasion Handle and tips Bipolar RF Handle Facial Ultrasound Handle Eye Ultrasound Handle Oxygen Spray Gun Six-Color PDT Handle Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber High-Frequency Handle Vacuum Pen Magic Bubble Pen Ice Hammer Nutrient Infusion components Four solution bottles Power cable English user manual Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Skin Analyzer operation Image-capture guidance Analysis-report review Treatment-handle setup Vacuum and RF parameter guidance PDT color-selection guidance Customized facial-program training Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation White, polarized and UV image capture Analysis-report interpretation Operation of all facial technologies Treatment-handle installation Vacuum-pressure adjustment RF and ultrasound settings PDT color selection Client consultation Customized facial planning Before-and-after comparisons Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydro Dermabrasion and Skin Analyzer System is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components 14-inch touchscreen Imaging components Vacuum-control system Original treatment handles Handle-connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-handle operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of tips, filters and consumables Damage caused by incompatible liquids or products Blockages caused by incorrect cleaning Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional facial equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment suitability depends on the selected technology. Some functions may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active cancer Active herpes simplex Open wounds or active skin infections Severe inflammatory skin conditions Recent surgery Recent injectable treatments Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication Recent isotretinoin use Reduced skin sensation Other contraindications listed in the operating manual RF energy, ultrasound, vacuum pressure, PDT intensity and exfoliation strength must be selected according to the client’s skin condition and tolerance. The Skin Analyzer provides imaging and software-assisted cosmetic assessment. It must not be used as a replacement for medical diagnosis. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Luxury medical spas Aesthetic clinics Professional skin-care centers Beauty institutions Dermatology practices Facial specialists Estheticians Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their skin-analysis services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the WikBeauty 15-in-1 Create Personalized Facial Programs
White, polarized and UV images support professional selection of cleansing, hydration, firming, brightening, acne-care and eye-area protocols. Document Treatment Progress
Before-and-after images can support professional consultations, treatment planning and progress discussions. Access Fifteen Professional Technologies
One platform includes Hydro Dermabrasion, RF, ultrasound, PDT, exfoliation, extraction, oxygen spray, cooling and nutrient-infusion functions. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does the Skin Analyzer work?
The analyzer captures images using white, polarized and ultraviolet light. Intelligent software organizes visible skin information to support cosmetic assessment and treatment planning. Does the analyzer provide a medical diagnosis?
No. The system provides imaging and software-assisted cosmetic skin analysis. It does not replace medical diagnosis or assessment by a qualified dermatologist. Which skin characteristics can be assessed?
The system can support professional observations related to visible texture, oiliness, hydration, pigmentation appearance, pores and general skin condition. What technologies are included?
The system includes Skin Analysis, Hydro Dermabrasion, Tripolar RF, Diamond Dermabrasion, Bipolar RF, Facial Ultrasound, Eye Ultrasound, Oxygen Spray, Six-Color PDT, Skin Scrubber, High Frequency, Vacuum Pen, Magic Bubble Pen, Ice Hammer and Nutrient Infusion. How long does a smart facial take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–60 minutes. Advanced analysis and multi-technology facial programs may require additional time. Can treatments be customized?
Yes. Practitioners can select technologies and settings according to the skin-analysis findings, professional assessment and client concerns. What are the six PDT colors?
The available PDT colors are red, blue, green, yellow, purple and orange. Can the system document progress?
Yes. Skin images can be captured before and after treatment to support professional comparison and follow-up planning. Is professional training included?
Remote professional training covers machine setup, Skin Analyzer operation, image capture, report review, treatment technologies, customized protocols, maintenance and safety. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Intelligent Skin Analysis to Your Facial Business
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydro Dermabrasion and Skin Analyzer System combines: Tri-spectral skin imaging Fifteen professional facial technologies A 14-inch intelligent touchscreen Customized skin-analysis and treatment programs Three-year parts warranty and professional support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its Skin Analyzer, treatment technologies and professional training. Order Your 15-in-1 Skin Analyzer System and Request Pricing Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Skin Concern
Applicable Technology
Intended Skin-Care Application
Congested-looking skin
Hydro Dermabrasion and Scrubber
Deep-cleansing support
Fine-line appearance
Tripolar or Bipolar RF
Anti-aging and firming support
Uneven-looking texture
Diamond Dermabrasion
Surface-refinement programs
Acne-prone skin
High Frequency and Blue PDT
Clarifying skin care
Dull-looking complexion
Oxygen, Ultrasound and PDT
Brightening programs
Eye-area concerns
Eye Ultrasound
Delicate-area skin care
Temporary post-treatment redness
Ice Hammer
Cooling and comfort support
Specification
Details
Product Name
WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydro Dermabrasion
Product Type
Professional multifunctional facial system
Number of Technologies
15
Maximum Power
500W
Display
14-inch touchscreen
Vacuum Pressure
0–100KPa adjustable
PDT Light Colors
Red, blue, green, yellow, purple and orange
Treatment Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes or longer
Voltage
100V–240V
Electrical Frequency
50Hz and 60Hz
Net Weight
42kg
Gross Weight
45kg
Package Dimensions
110 × 56 × 56cm
Handles and Attachments
15 professional technologies
Solution Bottles
Four
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, pressure regulation and temperature monitoring
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and technical assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Device Classification
Class II
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional 15-in-1 Hydra Diamond Dermabrasion System
Dual Exfoliation, Microneedling and Complete Facial Rejuvenation
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Diamond Dermabrasion Facial Machine is a multifunctional skin-care platform developed for professional skin-care studios, beauty salons, cosmetic clinics and medical spas.
The system combines Hydra Dermabrasion and Diamond Dermabrasion with 13 additional technologies for cleansing, exfoliation, hydration, skin firming, product application, acne-care support and facial rejuvenation.
Its 500W maximum power, 14-inch touchscreen, adjustable 0–100KPa vacuum pressure and 15 professional handles support customized treatments for different skin concerns and professional facial protocols.
Hydra and Diamond exfoliation | Fifteen technologies | 14-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Fifteen Treatment Technologies on One Professional Platform Hydra Dermabrasion
Hydra Dermabrasion combines controlled suction, liquid flow and compatible solutions for professional cleansing, exfoliation and hydration. Common applications include: Deep facial cleansing Surface exfoliation Pore-care programs Skin hydration Oil and debris removal General facial rejuvenation Diamond Dermabrasion
Diamond Dermabrasion provides controlled mechanical exfoliation using interchangeable diamond tips. Common applications include: Dead-skin removal Uneven-looking texture Rough-looking skin Dull complexion Surface skin polishing Facial-treatment preparation Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber
The ultrasonic scrubber supports surface cleansing and removal of loosened skin debris. Common applications include: Pore cleansing Surface exfoliation Skin-care preparation Oily-skin programs Texture-refinement treatments General facial cleansing Oxygen Spray Gun
The Oxygen Spray Gun provides a fine liquid mist for hydration and cosmetic-solution application. Common applications include: Skin hydration Cooling and refreshing Facial-solution application Dull-looking complexion Post-cleansing care General skin conditioning Vacuum Pen
The Vacuum Pen provides targeted suction for suitable facial areas. Common applications include: Pore-care treatments Blackhead extraction support Congested-looking skin T-zone cleansing Localized vacuum treatments Professional facial preparation Three-Polar RF Handle
The Three-Polar RF Handle delivers controlled radiofrequency energy for professional skin-firming programs. Common applications include: Skin-firming support Fine-line appearance Mature-looking skin Facial rejuvenation Elasticity-focused treatments Anti-aging protocols BIO Microcurrent
The BIO Microcurrent Handle provides controlled electrical stimulation for suitable facial areas. Common applications include: Facial-toning support Contour-refinement programs General skin conditioning Mature-skin treatments Professional lifting protocols Customized facial services High-Frequency Handle
The High-Frequency Handle supports professional clarifying and acne-focused skin-care programs. Common applications include: Acne-prone skin Oily-skin programs Post-extraction care Clarifying treatments Skin-conditioning services General facial wellness Facial Ultrasound
The Facial Ultrasound Handle supports professional facial massage and cosmetic-product application. Common applications include: Product-application support Facial massage Hydration treatments General rejuvenation Skin-conditioning programs Customized professional facials Eye Ultrasound
The Eye Ultrasound Handle is designed for suitable professional treatments around delicate eye-area zones. Common applications include: Under-eye skin care Eye-area massage Puffiness-focused programs Fine-line appearance Product-application support Delicate-area treatments Microneedling Pen
The Microneedling Pen creates controlled microchannels for professional skin-remodeling programs. Common applications include: Uneven-looking texture Fine-line appearance Acne-scar appearance Collagen-remodeling programs Skin-renewal treatments Customized rejuvenation Photon LED Therapy
The Photon LED Handle provides selected light programs for different professional skin-care objectives. Common applications include: Anti-aging programs Acne-prone skin care Brightening treatments Calming protocols General rejuvenation Post-facial support Magic Bubble Pen
The Magic Bubble Pen provides a foaming facial-cleansing treatment for suitable skin types. Common applications include: Deep-cleansing programs Oily-looking skin Pore-care treatments Facial preparation General skin purification Professional cleansing services Ice Hammer
The Ice Hammer provides controlled cooling for post-treatment comfort and calming protocols. Common applications include: Cooling after exfoliation Temporary redness Skin-comfort programs Post-extraction care Pore-care finishing steps Facial-treatment completion Nutrient Infusion
The Nutrient Infusion function supports professional application of compatible cosmetic serums and solutions. Common applications include: Hydration support Brightening programs Skin-conditioning treatments Post-cleansing care Customized facial protocols Maintenance treatments The appropriate technology, settings, products and treatment duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, sensitivity and professional protocol. Select the Right Facial Program for Each Client
The system supports customizable treatment pathways using one or more of its 15 technologies. Program 1: Dual Exfoliation and Deep Cleansing
A cleansing-focused program combining water-based and mechanical exfoliation. Recommended technologies: Hydra Dermabrasion Diamond Dermabrasion Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber Vacuum Pen Ice Hammer Recommended for: Congested-looking skin Rough-looking texture Oily-skin programs Professional deep-cleansing services Program 2: Hydration and Brightening
A moisture-focused program designed to support refreshed and radiant-looking skin. Recommended technologies: Hydra Dermabrasion Oxygen Spray Gun Facial Ultrasound Photon LED Therapy Nutrient Infusion Recommended for: Dry-looking skin Dull complexion Brightening treatments Hydration-focused facials Program 3: Anti-Aging and Firming
A rejuvenation program for mature-looking skin, fine lines and firmness concerns. Recommended technologies: Three-Polar RF BIO Microcurrent Microneedling Pen Facial Ultrasound Photon LED Therapy Recommended for: Mature-looking skin Fine-line appearance Skin-firming programs Professional anti-aging services Program 4: Texture and Scar Appearance
A customized skin-renewal program for uneven-looking texture and suitable scar concerns. Recommended technologies: Diamond Dermabrasion Microneedling Pen Facial Ultrasound Photon LED Therapy Nutrient Infusion Recommended for: Uneven-looking texture Acne-scar appearance Rough-looking skin Professional renewal programs Precision Vacuum Control for Customized Facial Treatments
The Hydra Diamond Dermabrasion System provides adjustable vacuum pressure from 0 to 100KPa. Each setting should be selected according to the treatment handle, skin condition, treatment area and client comfort. The adjustable vacuum control provides greater flexibility over suction strength and treatment comfort. New clients should begin with lower vacuum and energy settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Facial Treatment Areas
The 15 treatment technologies support professional treatments for multiple facial and skin areas. Full-Face Treatments
Forehead Cheeks Nose Chin Jawline General facial skin Delicate-Area Treatments
Suitable under-eye areas Outer eye area Upper cheeks Lip-contour area Other professionally assessed zones Neck and Upper-Body Treatments
Neck Décolletage Upper chest Suitable hand areas Other appropriate skin zones Professional Facial and Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected handle, products, vacuum pressure, energy settings and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Facial Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s skin concerns, treatment history, current products, sensitivity and contraindications. The appropriate technologies are then selected. 2. System Preparation
The required handles, tips, bottles and solutions are installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that all connections are secure. 3. Parameter Selection
Vacuum pressure, RF energy, ultrasound settings, light mode, microneedling depth and other available parameters are selected according to the client’s skin condition and professional protocol. 4. Facial Treatment
The operator performs the selected facial steps in the appropriate sequence. A complete professional session generally lasts approximately 30–60 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and suitable moisturizer and sunscreen are applied where appropriate. The client receives customized aftercare instructions. Temporary redness, dryness, sensitivity, tingling or mild swelling may occur, particularly after Diamond Dermabrasion or microneedling. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines dual exfoliation with 13 additional facial technologies for streamlined professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Fifteen professional treatment technologies Hydra and Diamond Dermabrasion Professional microneedling pen 14-inch touchscreen control Adjustable 0–100KPa vacuum Maximum 500W power output Fifteen handles and attachments Modern vertical design with mobility wheels Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, 15 treatment technologies and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One 15-in-1 Hydra Diamond Dermabrasion main unit Hydra Dermabrasion Handle Diamond Dermabrasion Handle and tips Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber Oxygen Spray Gun Vacuum Pen Three-Polar RF Handle BIO Microcurrent Handle High-Frequency Handle Facial Ultrasound Handle Eye Ultrasound Handle Microneedling Pen Photon LED Handle Magic Bubble Pen Ice Hammer Nutrient Infusion components Four solution bottles Power cable English user manual Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup instructions Hydra and Diamond Dermabrasion protocols Vacuum and energy-setting guidance Microneedling operation guidance Facial-program training Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Operation of all 15 technologies Treatment-handle installation Hydra Dermabrasion protocols Diamond-tip selection Vacuum-pressure adjustment RF and ultrasound settings LED light selection Microneedling operation Client consultation Facial-program creation Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Diamond Dermabrasion Facial Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components 14-inch touchscreen Vacuum-control system Internal pumps Original treatment handles Handle-connection components Other eligible components supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-handle operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of tips, filters, needles and consumables Damage caused by incompatible liquids or products Blockages caused by incorrect cleaning Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional facial equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment suitability depends on the selected technology. Some functions may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active cancer Active herpes simplex Open wounds or active skin infections Severe inflammatory skin conditions Recent surgery Recent injectable treatments Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication Recent isotretinoin use Bleeding disorders A history of abnormal or keloid scarring Reduced skin sensation Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Microneedling cartridges must be handled according to professional hygiene and infection-control requirements. RF energy, ultrasound, vacuum pressure, LED intensity, diamond-tip pressure and microneedling depth must be selected according to the client’s skin condition and tolerance. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Professional skin-care studios Beauty salons Cosmetic clinics Medical spas Aesthetic treatment centers Facial specialists Estheticians Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their professional facial services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the WikBeauty 15-in-1 Dual Exfoliation System? Combine Two Exfoliation Technologies
Hydra Dermabrasion provides water-based cleansing and exfoliation, while Diamond Dermabrasion provides controlled mechanical surface polishing. Access Fifteen Professional Technologies
One platform supports exfoliation, hydration, vacuum cleansing, RF, microcurrent, ultrasound, LED, microneedling, cooling and nutrient application. Create Customized Treatment Pathways
Practitioners can combine selected technologies for cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, acne-care, brightening and texture-refinement programs. Receive Professional Training
Training covers machine setup, all 15 technologies, Hydra and Diamond Dermabrasion, microneedling, treatment protocols, safety and maintenance. Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates and professional technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is dual exfoliation?
Dual exfoliation combines Hydra Dermabrasion with Diamond Dermabrasion. Hydra uses liquid flow and controlled suction, while Diamond Dermabrasion uses mechanical diamond tips for surface polishing. Why combine Hydra and Diamond Dermabrasion?
The two technologies allow practitioners to customize exfoliation according to skin condition and treatment goals. Hydra supports cleansing and hydration, while Diamond Dermabrasion provides stronger mechanical exfoliation for suitable skin. What technologies are included?
The system includes Hydra Dermabrasion, Diamond Dermabrasion, Skin Scrubber, Oxygen Spray, Vacuum Pen, Three-Polar RF, BIO Microcurrent, High Frequency, Facial Ultrasound, Eye Ultrasound, Microneedling, Photon LED, Magic Bubble Pen, Ice Hammer and Nutrient Infusion. How long does a professional facial take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–60 minutes. Treatment duration depends on the selected technologies, skin concern and customized protocol. Can treatments be customized?
Yes. Practitioners can combine suitable technologies to create cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, acne-care, brightening and skin-renewal programs. Can the machine support acne-scar protocols?
The microneedling function can be incorporated into professional protocols intended to improve the appearance of suitable acne scars. Results vary according to scar type and skin condition. Is there downtime?
Recovery depends on the selected technologies and treatment intensity. Hydra Dermabrasion may require little recovery, while Diamond Dermabrasion or microneedling may cause temporary redness and sensitivity. Is the system suitable for sensitive skin?
Protocols can be customized with gentler technologies and lower settings. Diamond Dermabrasion, RF or microneedling may not be appropriate for every sensitive-skin client. Is professional training included?
Remote professional training covers machine setup, operation of all technologies, treatment protocols, cleaning, maintenance and safety. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Dual-Exfoliation Facial Treatments to Your Business
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Diamond Dermabrasion Facial Machine combines: Hydra and Diamond dual exfoliation Fifteen professional treatment technologies A 14-inch touchscreen and adjustable vacuum Microneedling and customizable facial programs Three-year parts warranty and professional support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment technologies, package contents and professional training. Order Your 15-in-1 Hydra Diamond Dermabrasion System and Request Pricing Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Vacuum Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Vacuum
Sensitive skin and delicate facial areas
Moderate Vacuum
General Hydra Dermabrasion and cleansing
Higher Vacuum
Appropriately selected congested or thicker skin areas
Customized Vacuum
Treatment-specific professional facial protocols
Skin Concern
Applicable Technology
Intended Skin-Care Application
Congested-looking skin
Hydra, scrubber and vacuum
Deep-cleansing support
Rough-looking texture
Diamond Dermabrasion
Mechanical exfoliation
Dry or dehydrated-looking skin
Hydra, oxygen and infusion
Hydration-focused care
Fine-line appearance
RF, ultrasound or microneedling
Anti-aging support
Acne-scar appearance
Microneedling and LED
Skin-renewal programs
Acne-prone skin
Bubble Pen, high frequency or LED
Clarifying skin care
Eye-area concerns
Eye Ultrasound
Delicate-area skin care
Temporary post-treatment redness
Ice Hammer
Cooling and comfort support
Specification
Details
Product Name
WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Diamond Dermabrasion Facial Machine
Product Type
Professional multifunctional facial system
Number of Technologies
15
Dual Exfoliation
Hydra Dermabrasion and Diamond Dermabrasion
Maximum Power
500W
Display
14-inch touchscreen
Vacuum Pressure
0–100KPa adjustable
Treatment Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes
Voltage Options
110V and 220V
Electrical Frequency
50Hz and 60Hz
Machine Dimensions
42 × 52 × 98cm
Net Weight
40kg
Package Dimensions
110 × 56 × 56cm
Gross Weight
45kg
Handles and Attachments
15
Solution Bottles
Four
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, pressure regulation and temperature monitoring
Design
Black vertical housing with gray top and mobility wheels
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Professional 14-in-1 Hydro Dermabrasion System
Fourteen Facial Technologies for Customized Professional Skin Care
The WikBeauty 14-in-1 Hydro Dermabrasion and Skin Scrubber System is a multifunctional facial platform developed for professional skin-care studios, beauty salons, medical spas and aesthetic clinics.
The system combines 14 treatment technologies for cleansing, exfoliation, hydration, blackhead-removal support, skin firming, product application, acne-prone skin care, eye-area treatments and facial rejuvenation.
Its 450W maximum power, 12-inch touchscreen, adjustable 0–100KPa vacuum pressure and 14 professional handles allow practitioners to create customized facial protocols for different skin concerns.
Fourteen facial technologies | 12-inch touchscreen | Adjustable vacuum control | Three-year warranty
Fourteen Treatment Technologies on One Professional Platform Hydro Dermabrasion
Hydro Dermabrasion combines controlled suction, liquid flow and compatible solutions for professional cleansing, exfoliation and hydration. Common applications include: Deep facial cleansing Surface exfoliation Pore-care programs Skin hydration Oil and debris removal General facial rejuvenation Diamond Dermabrasion
Diamond Dermabrasion provides controlled mechanical exfoliation with interchangeable diamond tips. Common applications include: Dead-skin removal Uneven-looking texture Rough-looking skin Dull complexion Skin polishing Facial-treatment preparation Blackhead Removal
The targeted vacuum attachment provides controlled suction for suitable congested facial areas. Common applications include: Blackhead-removal support T-zone cleansing Pore-care treatments Congested-looking skin Localized facial cleansing Professional extraction protocols Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber
The Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber supports surface cleansing and removal of loosened skin debris. Common applications include: Pore cleansing Surface exfoliation Impurity removal Skin-care preparation Oily-skin programs General facial cleansing Oxygen Spray Gun
The Oxygen Spray Gun provides a fine liquid mist for hydration and cosmetic-solution application. Common applications include: Skin hydration Cooling and refreshing Facial-solution application Dull-looking complexion Post-cleansing care General skin conditioning RF Tightening Handle
The RF Handle delivers controlled radiofrequency energy for professional skin-firming programs. Common applications include: Skin-firming support Fine-line appearance Mature-looking skin Facial rejuvenation Elasticity-focused treatments Anti-aging programs BIO Microcurrent
The BIO Microcurrent Handle provides controlled electrical stimulation for suitable facial areas. Common applications include: Facial-toning support Contour-refinement programs Mature-looking skin General facial conditioning Firming protocols Customized professional services High-Frequency Handle
The High-Frequency Handle supports suitable professional acne-care and clarifying programs. Common applications include: Acne-prone skin Oily-skin programs Post-extraction support Clarifying facials General skin conditioning Professional spa treatments Facial Ultrasound
The Facial Ultrasound Handle supports professional facial massage and cosmetic-product application. Common applications include: Product-application support Facial massage Hydration treatments General rejuvenation Skin-conditioning programs Customized professional facials Eye Ultrasound
The Eye Ultrasound Handle is designed for appropriate professional treatments around suitable eye-area zones. Common applications include: Under-eye skin care Eye-area massage Puffiness-focused programs Fine-line appearance Product-application support Delicate-area treatments PDT Light Therapy
The PDT Handle provides selectable LED light programs for different professional skin-care objectives. Common applications include: Anti-aging programs Acne-prone skin care Brightening treatments Calming protocols General skin rejuvenation Post-facial support Cold Hammer
The Cold Hammer provides controlled cooling for post-treatment comfort and calming protocols. Common applications include: Cooling after facial treatments Temporary redness Skin-comfort programs Post-extraction support Pore-care finishing steps Facial-treatment completion Exfoliation Handle
The Exfoliation Handle provides controlled surface polishing for suitable skin types. Common applications include: Gentle exfoliation Surface skin refinement Uneven-looking texture Facial preparation Dull-looking skin Professional polishing treatments Nutrient Infusion
The Nutrient Infusion function supports professional application of compatible cosmetic serums and solutions. Common applications include: Hydration support Brightening programs Skin-conditioning treatments Post-cleansing care Customized facial protocols Maintenance treatments The appropriate technology, settings, products and treatment duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, sensitivity and professional protocol. Select the Right Facial Program for Each Client
The system supports customized facial pathways using one or more of its 14 technologies. Program 1: Deep Cleansing and Pore Care
A cleansing-focused program for suitable oily, congested or blackhead-prone skin. Recommended technologies: Hydro Dermabrasion Blackhead Removal Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber High-Frequency Handle Cold Hammer Recommended for: Congested-looking skin Oily-skin programs Blackhead-removal support Professional deep-cleansing services Program 2: Hydration and Brightening
A moisture-focused program designed to support refreshed and radiant-looking skin. Recommended technologies: Hydro Dermabrasion Oxygen Spray Gun Facial Ultrasound PDT Light Therapy Nutrient Infusion Recommended for: Dry-looking skin Dull complexion Skin-brightening services Hydration-focused facials Program 3: Anti-Aging and Firming
A rejuvenation program for mature-looking skin, fine lines and firmness concerns. Recommended technologies: Hydro Dermabrasion RF Tightening BIO Microcurrent Facial Ultrasound PDT Light Therapy Recommended for: Mature-looking skin Fine-line appearance Skin-firming programs Professional anti-aging services Program 4: Sensitive and Eye-Area Care
A gentler program for suitable sensitive-looking skin and delicate eye areas. Recommended technologies: Gentle Hydro Dermabrasion Oxygen Spray Gun Eye Ultrasound Cold Hammer Nutrient Infusion Recommended for: Sensitive-looking skin Under-eye concerns Puffiness-focused programs Comfort-focused facials Precision Vacuum Control for Customized Facial Treatments
The Hydro Dermabrasion System provides adjustable vacuum pressure from 0 to 100KPa. Each setting should be selected according to the treatment handle, skin condition, treatment area and client comfort. The adjustable vacuum control provides greater flexibility over suction strength and treatment comfort. New clients should begin with lower vacuum and energy settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Facial Treatment Areas
The 14 treatment technologies support professional treatments for multiple facial and skin areas. Full-Face Treatments
Forehead Cheeks Nose Chin Jawline General facial skin Delicate-Area Treatments
Suitable under-eye areas Outer eye area Upper cheeks Lip-contour area Other professionally assessed zones Neck and Upper-Body Treatments
Neck Décolletage Upper chest Suitable hand areas Other appropriate skin zones Professional Facial and Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected handle, products, vacuum pressure, energy settings and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Facial Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s skin concerns, treatment history, current products, sensitivity and contraindications. The appropriate technologies are then selected. 2. System Preparation
The required handles, tips, bottles and solutions are installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that all connections are secure. 3. Parameter Selection
Vacuum pressure, RF energy, ultrasound settings, light mode and other available parameters are selected according to the client’s skin condition and professional protocol. 4. Facial Treatment
The operator performs the selected facial steps in the appropriate sequence. A complete professional session generally lasts approximately 30–60 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and suitable moisturizer and sunscreen are applied where appropriate. The client receives customized aftercare instructions. Temporary redness, dryness, sensitivity, tingling or mild swelling may occur depending on the selected technologies. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines 14 facial technologies with touchscreen controls for streamlined professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Fourteen professional treatment technologies 14 treatment handles and attachments 12-inch touchscreen Adjustable 0–100KPa vacuum Maximum 450W power Dual-voltage compatibility Automatic safety controls Durable professional construction Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, 14 professional technologies and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One 14-in-1 Hydro Dermabrasion main unit Hydro Dermabrasion Handle Diamond Dermabrasion Handle and tips Blackhead-Removal Vacuum Handle Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber Oxygen Spray Gun RF Tightening Handle BIO Microcurrent Handle High-Frequency Handle Facial Ultrasound Handle Eye Ultrasound Handle PDT Light Therapy Handle Cold Hammer Exfoliation Handle Nutrient Infusion components Power cable English user manual Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup instructions Hydro Dermabrasion protocols Vacuum and RF parameter guidance Ultrasound and PDT guidance Customized facial-program training Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Operation of all 14 technologies Treatment-handle installation Hydro Dermabrasion protocols Vacuum-pressure adjustment RF and microcurrent settings Ultrasound operation PDT light selection Client consultation Customized facial planning Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty 14-in-1 Hydro Dermabrasion and Skin Scrubber System is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components 12-inch touchscreen Vacuum-control system Internal pumps Original treatment handles Handle-connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-handle operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of tips, filters and consumables Damage caused by incompatible liquids or products Blockages caused by incorrect cleaning Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional facial equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment suitability depends on the selected technology. Some functions may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active cancer Active herpes simplex Open wounds or active skin infections Severe inflammatory skin conditions Severe rosacea aggravated by stimulation Recent surgery Recent injectable treatments Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication Reduced skin sensation Other contraindications listed in the operating manual RF energy, microcurrent, ultrasound, vacuum pressure, PDT intensity and exfoliation strength must be selected according to the client’s skin condition and tolerance. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Professional skin-care studios Beauty salons Medical spas Aesthetic clinics Dermatology practices Facial specialists Estheticians Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their facial services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the WikBeauty 14-in-1 Hydro Dermabrasion System? Access Fourteen Facial Technologies
One professional platform supports cleansing, exfoliation, vacuum care, RF, microcurrent, ultrasound, PDT light, cooling and nutrient application. Create Customized Facial Programs
Practitioners can combine suitable technologies to create cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, acne-care, brightening and eye-area protocols. Treat Multiple Skin Concerns
The system supports professional programs for congestion, dehydration, fine lines, acne-prone skin, dullness, eye-area concerns and general facial rejuvenation. Receive Professional Training
Training covers machine setup, all 14 technologies, treatment protocols, client consultation, safety, cleaning and maintenance. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates and professional technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What technologies are included?
The system includes Hydro Dermabrasion, Diamond Dermabrasion, Blackhead Removal, Ultrasonic Scrubber, Oxygen Spray, RF Tightening, BIO Microcurrent, High Frequency, Facial Ultrasound, Eye Ultrasound, PDT Light Therapy, Cold Hammer, Exfoliation and Nutrient Infusion. How long does a professional facial take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–60 minutes. Treatment duration depends on the selected technologies, skin concern and customized protocol. Can treatments be customized?
Yes. Practitioners can combine suitable technologies to create cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, acne-care, brightening and eye-area programs. Can the system support blackhead-removal treatments?
Yes. The targeted vacuum attachment, Hydro Dermabrasion and Ultrasonic Scrubber can be incorporated into professional pore-care and blackhead-removal protocols. Is the system suitable for sensitive skin?
Protocols can be customized with lower vacuum and energy settings. More intensive technologies may not be appropriate for every sensitive-skin client. Is there downtime?
Recovery depends on the selected technologies and treatment intensity. Temporary redness, dryness or sensitivity may occur. Is professional training included?
Remote professional training covers machine setup, operation of all technologies, treatment protocols, cleaning, maintenance and safety. A training certificate is provided. What is the adjustable vacuum range?
The Hydro Dermabrasion system provides adjustable vacuum pressure from 0 to 100KPa. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add a Complete 14-in-1 Facial System to Your Business
The WikBeauty 14-in-1 Hydro Dermabrasion and Skin Scrubber System combines: Fourteen professional treatment technologies A 12-inch touchscreen and adjustable vacuum Customizable facial-treatment pathways Professional training and technical support Three-year parts warranty Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment handles, package contents and professional training. Order Your 14-in-1 Hydro Dermabrasion System and Request Pricing Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Vacuum Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Vacuum
Sensitive skin and delicate facial areas
Moderate Vacuum
General Hydro Dermabrasion and cleansing
Higher Vacuum
Appropriately selected congested or thicker skin areas
Customized Vacuum
Treatment-specific professional facial protocols
Skin Concern
Applicable Technology
Intended Skin-Care Application
Congested-looking skin
Hydro Dermabrasion and Scrubber
Deep-cleansing support
Blackheads and visible pores
Vacuum and High Frequency
Pore-care programs
Dry or dehydrated-looking skin
Hydro, Oxygen and Infusion
Hydration-focused care
Fine-line appearance
RF, Microcurrent or Ultrasound
Anti-aging support
Acne-prone skin
High Frequency and PDT
Clarifying skin care
Dull-looking complexion
Oxygen, Ultrasound and PDT
Brightening programs
Eye-area concerns
Eye Ultrasound
Delicate-area skin care
Temporary post-treatment redness
Cold Hammer
Cooling and comfort support
Specification
Details
Product Name
WikBeauty 14-in-1 Hydro Dermabrasion and Skin Scrubber System
Product Type
Professional multifunctional facial system
Number of Technologies
14
Handles and Attachments
14
Maximum Power
450W
Display
12-inch touchscreen
Vacuum Pressure
0–100KPa adjustable
Treatment Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes
Voltage Options
110V and 220V
Electrical Frequency
50Hz and 60Hz
Net Weight
40kg
Gross Weight
44kg
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, pressure regulation and temperature monitoring
Design
Durable professional floor-standing system
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and technical assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
From $487.77
Professional Vacuum BBL Body-Shaping System Non-Surgical Buttock Lifting, Breast Firming, and Cellulite Care The Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device is a professional, non-invasive body-shaping system designed to lift, firm, and enhance the natural appearance of the buttocks and breasts without surgery or implants. Using adjustable negative-pressure vacuum therapy and suction massage, the system supports blood circulation, lymphatic drainage, tissue stimulation, and natural contour enhancement. Multiple vacuum cups allow professionals to adapt treatments to different body shapes and treatment areas. Designed for slimming salons, spas, physiotherapy centers, wellness facilities, and aesthetic clinics, this professional BBL machine supports buttock lifting, breast firming, cellulite reduction, hip shaping, and thigh contouring through comfortable 20–40-minute sessions. Vacuum Therapy | Multiple Cup Sizes | Buttock and Breast Treatments | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform Vacuum Buttock Lifting
Professional vacuum cups create controlled suction around the buttocks to stimulate the tissue and support a fuller, firmer, and more lifted appearance. Common applications include: Non-surgical buttock lifting Buttock contour enhancement Improved shape and symmetry Natural-looking volume support Hip and buttock curve definition Breast Firming and Shaping
Different cup sizes allow professionals to adapt vacuum treatments to the client’s breast shape and treatment objectives. Controlled suction supports circulation and tissue stimulation for a firmer and more defined appearance. Common applications include: Breast-firming treatments Natural shape enhancement Improved contour and symmetry Tissue-stimulation programs Maintenance treatments Cellulite and Body-Contouring Therapy
Vacuum massage supports blood flow and lymphatic circulation in areas affected by uneven texture or cellulite. It can also be incorporated into professional thigh, hip, and buttock-contouring programs. Common applications include: Cellulite-appearance reduction Thigh and hip contouring Skin-texture improvement Lymphatic massage support Smoother-looking body contours Select the Right Program for Each Client Buttock Lifting Program
A focused treatment program designed to improve the shape, firmness, symmetry, and lifted appearance of the buttocks. Recommended applications: Buttocks, lower buttock line, outer hips, and surrounding contour areas. Recommended for: Clients seeking a non-surgical BBL-style treatment with natural-looking contour improvement. Breast Firming Program
A controlled vacuum treatment designed to support breast firmness, shape, tissue stimulation, and overall contour. Recommended applications: Breast area using appropriately sized vacuum cups and carefully selected suction settings. Recommended for: Suitable clients seeking non-surgical breast-firming and shaping treatments. Cellulite-Smoothing Program
A suction-massage program focused on improving circulation and reducing the visible appearance of uneven skin texture. Recommended applications: Buttocks, hips, inner thighs, outer thighs, and other compatible areas affected by cellulite. Recommended for: Clients seeking smoother-looking skin and improved lower-body contours. Maintenance and Body-Shaping Program
A flexible follow-up program designed to support previously achieved lifting, firming, and contouring results. Recommended applications: Buttocks, breasts, hips, and thighs previously treated with vacuum therapy. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and want periodic maintenance sessions. Adjustable Vacuum and Treatment Settings Vacuum intensity must be selected gradually according to the client’s comfort, skin condition, treatment area, and professional protocol. Excessive suction can cause discomfort or temporary bruising and should be avoided. Adjustable Treatment Areas Buttock and Hip Areas
Different vacuum cups can be positioned across the buttocks and surrounding hip areas to support a more lifted and balanced silhouette. Treatment objectives include: Buttock lifting Natural contour enhancement Improved firmness Shape and symmetry support Hip and buttock curve definition Cellulite-appearance reduction Breast Area
Appropriately sized cups can be used for carefully controlled breast-firming and shaping programs. Treatment objectives include: Breast-firming support Natural shape enhancement Improved contour Tissue stimulation Symmetry support Maintenance of treatment results Thigh and Lower-Body Areas
Vacuum massage can be applied to compatible thigh and lower-body areas where cellulite, uneven texture, or reduced definition is present. Treatment objectives include: Inner- and outer-thigh contouring Cellulite-appearance improvement Smoother-looking skin Circulation and lymphatic support Improved lower-body proportions Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s goals, medical history, skin condition, previous procedures, and potential contraindications. Step 2: Body Assessment
Assess the intended treatment area and select the appropriate vacuum cups, suction level, session duration, and treatment protocol. Step 3: Cup Placement
Position the selected cups securely over the buttocks or breasts, or prepare the appropriate applicator for cellulite and body-contouring massage. Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Begin with a low vacuum level and increase the intensity gradually according to client comfort and tissue response. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes. Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the cups carefully, inspect the treated skin, and provide appropriate hydration, lifestyle, massage, and maintenance recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Vacuum BBL Machine combines adjustable vacuum pressure, multiple cup sizes, and straightforward controls in one professional body-shaping platform. Key advantages include: Non-surgical body-shaping technology Adjustable negative-pressure suction Multiple cups for different body areas Buttock, breast, thigh, and hip applications Approximately 20–40-minute sessions Customized 6–10-session treatment courses Digital touchscreen or knob operation 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Technical Specifications Treatment experiences, session requirements, and visible outcomes may vary according to the client’s anatomy, tissue condition, lifestyle, treatment frequency, selected vacuum settings, and adherence to aftercare recommendations. Results should not be presented as guaranteed or equivalent to surgical enhancement. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device Multiple vacuum cups in different sizes Compatible vacuum tubing and connectors 1 × Compatible power cable Standard machine accessories 1 × Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Setup and operating guide Vacuum-cup placement instructions Treatment-protocol guidance Safety and contraindication information Cleaning and maintenance instructions Professional training support Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help machine owners and treatment providers use the vacuum BBL system correctly and confidently. Training and support cover: Machine installation and initial setup Vacuum-cup selection Correct cup positioning Vacuum-intensity adjustment Buttock-lifting protocols Breast-firming protocols Cellulite and body-contouring treatments Client consultation and contraindication screening Cleaning and routine maintenance Troubleshooting assistance Treatment-course planning Ongoing after-sales support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising under normal operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before repair assistance or replacement parts are provided. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting guidance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair instructions Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication during the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information. Provide a clear description of the technical issue. Submit photos or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the machine. Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect machine operation Excessive or unsuitable vacuum settings Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper electrical installation or voltage Water damage or unsuitable storage conditions Failure to follow cleaning and maintenance instructions Normal wear of tubing, cups, seals, and other consumable components Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
A complete client consultation and contraindication assessment should be performed before treatment. The machine must be used only by trained operators following the supplied instructions and applicable local requirements. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting or bleeding disorders Current anticoagulant medication Severe varicose veins in the treatment area Active infection or inflammation Open wounds, rashes, or damaged skin Recent surgery in the intended treatment area Breast implants or other implants without professional clearance Undiagnosed breast lumps or breast-health concerns History of thrombosis Uncontrolled diabetes Reduced skin sensation Severe skin fragility Any medical condition requiring professional clearance Clients with breast-related concerns, implants, previous surgery, or unexplained symptoms should consult a qualified healthcare professional before treatment. Operating Precautions
Complete a consultation before the client’s first treatment. Inspect the machine, tubing, connectors, and cups before use. Clean and disinfect all reusable applicators properly. Select the correct cup size for the treatment area. Begin treatment at a low vacuum level. Increase suction gradually according to client comfort. Never use excessive suction to accelerate results. Monitor the skin continuously during treatment. Stop treatment if unusual pain, severe redness, dizziness, or discomfort occurs. Do not apply vacuum over open wounds or inflamed skin. Avoid prolonged stationary suction unless specified by the protocol. Do not exceed the recommended session duration. Release the vacuum before removing treatment cups. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Keep accurate treatment records when required. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Vacuum BBL Machine is suitable for: Body-contouring clinics Beauty salons Slimming centers Aesthetic clinics Wellness centers Day spas and medical spas Physiotherapy centers where locally permitted Professional massage and body-shaping providers Users should complete appropriate training, follow the supplied operating instructions, and comply with local rules governing aesthetic and vacuum-therapy equipment. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Vacuum BBL Machine? 1. Multi-Application Vacuum Therapy
One professional platform supports buttock lifting, breast firming, cellulite care, thigh contouring, and hip shaping. 2. Multiple Vacuum Cup Sizes
Different cup sizes help professionals accommodate varying body shapes and create more customized treatment programs. 3. Adjustable Treatment Intensity
The vacuum level can be adapted according to the treatment area, tissue condition, and client comfort. 4. Non-Surgical Body Shaping
The system offers a non-invasive alternative for suitable clients seeking natural-looking contour enhancement without implants or surgical downtime. 5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates, professional operating guidance, after-sales technical support, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the Wikbeauty Vacuum BBL Machine work?
The system uses vacuum cups and controlled negative pressure to stimulate the treatment area, support circulation, mobilize tissue, and improve the appearance of firmness and shape. Q: What treatments can the machine provide?
The machine supports buttock lifting, breast firming and shaping, cellulite care, hip contouring, thigh treatments, and vacuum massage. Q: Is this a surgical BBL procedure?
No. This is a non-surgical vacuum body-shaping treatment. It does not involve fat transfer, anesthesia, incisions, or implants. Q: Can vacuum therapy produce the same results as surgery?
No. Vacuum therapy may support temporary, natural-looking lifting and contour improvement, but it should not be presented as producing the same degree or permanence of change as surgery. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Clients generally experience a pulling or suction-massage sensation. Comfort varies, and the vacuum intensity must be adjusted according to the client’s tolerance. Q: How long does one session take?
A typical treatment lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, depending on the selected area and protocol. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course generally includes approximately 6–10 sessions. The final recommendation should be based on the client’s condition and goals. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice a temporary lifting or plumping effect after a session. More developed contouring results generally require a structured treatment course, and individual outcomes vary. Q: Which areas can be treated?
The primary treatment areas are the buttocks, breasts, thighs, and hips. Q: Can the machine help improve the appearance of cellulite?
Yes. Vacuum massage can support circulation and improve the appearance of uneven skin texture on the buttocks, hips, and thighs. Q: Can different cup sizes be used?
Yes. The machine includes multiple vacuum cups designed to accommodate different body areas, shapes, and treatment requirements. Q: Is there downtime after treatment?
Most suitable clients do not require a formal recovery period. Temporary redness, tenderness, or mild bruising may occur depending on suction intensity and individual sensitivity. Q: How long do the results last?
Result duration varies. Maintenance sessions, regular exercise, balanced nutrition, hydration, and stable body weight may help support the appearance of the treated areas. Q: Is the treatment suitable for clients with breast implants?
Clients with breast implants or previous breast surgery should obtain clearance from a qualified healthcare professional before treatment. Q: Can two areas be treated during the same appointment?
Compatible areas may be incorporated into the same appointment when supported by the machine configuration and professional protocol. Q: Is vacuum therapy suitable for every client?
No. Each client must complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment. Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility. Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine setup, cup selection, applicator placement, treatment settings, safety, contraindications, cleaning, and basic maintenance. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Q: What is included in the package?
The package includes the main machine, multiple vacuum cups, compatible tubing and connectors, a power cable, operating documentation, training guidance, standard accessories, and a warranty card. Add Professional Vacuum BBL Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device gives salons, spas, wellness facilities, and aesthetic clinics a versatile platform for non-surgical buttock lifting, breast firming, cellulite care, and lower-body contouring. Five key benefits: Professional vacuum therapy and suction massage Multiple cup sizes for customized treatments Adjustable intensity for different body areas Buttock, breast, hip, and thigh applications CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Vacuum Intensity
Adjustable negative pressure
Allows suction strength to be adapted to the treatment area and client comfort
Treatment Mode
Vacuum therapy and suction massage
Supports lifting, shaping, cellulite care, and circulation-focused treatments
Cup Size
Multiple cup sizes
Accommodates different body shapes and treatment objectives
Treatment Area
Buttocks, breasts, thighs, and hips
Enables customized body-shaping protocols
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Supports targeted and comprehensive treatment programs
Treatment Course
Approximately 6–10 sessions recommended
Provides a structured course for progressive contouring results
Control System
Digital touchscreen or knob controls
Enables convenient adjustment of treatment settings
Power Compatibility
110V/220V
Supports professional use in different international markets
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Non-Surgical BBL Treatment
Buttocks
Support a fuller, firmer, and more lifted appearance
Buttock Contouring
Buttocks and lower buttock line
Improve shape and overall definition
Hip Shaping
Hips and outer buttocks
Create smoother and more balanced curves
Breast Firming
Breast area
Support firmness and natural contour
Breast Shaping
Breast area
Improve the appearance of shape and symmetry
Cellulite Care
Buttocks, hips, and thighs
Reduce the visible appearance of uneven texture
Thigh Contouring
Inner and outer thighs
Support smoother and more defined contours
Vacuum Massage
Compatible body areas
Support circulation and tissue stimulation
Lymphatic Support
Buttocks, thighs, and hips
Promote professional drainage-focused treatments
Maintenance Treatments
Previously treated areas
Help maintain lifting and shaping results
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device
Alternative Name
Professional Vacuum BBL Machine
Technology
Vacuum therapy and suction massage
Primary Functions
Buttock lifting, breast firming and shaping, cellulite reduction, and body contouring
Applicators
Multiple vacuum cups in different sizes
Treatment Areas
Buttocks, breasts, thighs, and hips
Vacuum Level
Adjustable according to treatment area and client comfort
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 6–10 sessions
Display and Controls
Digital touchscreen or knob controls
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$1,299.00
Professional Pressotherapy and Lymphatic Massage System
Sequential Air Compression for Professional Wellness and Recovery Treatments
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device is a professional air-compression therapy system developed for beauty salons, wellness centers, physiotherapy clinics, medical spas and body-contouring studios.
Its digital touchscreen provides adjustable pressure, intensity, treatment duration and program selection. Multiple overlapping air chambers inflate and deflate sequentially to create a rhythmic compression massage across the selected treatment areas.
The system can be used as a standalone wellness service or combined with suitable body-contouring and recovery programs.
Sequential air compression | Full-body garment | Adjustable treatment programs | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Applications on One Pressotherapy Platform Lymphatic Drainage
The sequential compression system supports natural lymphatic movement by applying controlled pressure through multiple overlapping air chambers. Common treatment applications include: Lymphatic drainage programs Fluid-movement support Leg-heaviness treatments General wellness sessions Post-treatment drainage support Maintenance-oriented wellness programs Water-Retention Support
The pressotherapy garment applies rhythmic compression to the selected body areas, supporting professional programs for clients concerned about temporary water retention or feelings of heaviness. Common treatment areas include: Legs Thighs Waist Abdomen Arms Full body Circulation and Recovery
Sequential compression may support circulation and recovery-oriented wellness programs. Common applications include: Post-workout recovery Tired-leg treatments Muscle-relaxation programs General circulation support Wellness and recovery sessions Suitable post-procedure support programs Relaxation and Wellness
The rhythmic inflation and deflation of the garment creates a comfortable compression-massage experience. Common applications include: Relaxation treatments Spa wellness programs Body-care packages Stress-reduction services Maintenance treatments Membership-based wellness programs The appropriate pressure, intensity, duration and program should be selected according to the client’s condition, comfort level and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Your Clients
The system supports adjustable programs for different treatment objectives. The appropriate program should be selected following consultation and client assessment. Program 1: Lymphatic Drainage
A structured sequential-compression program designed to support natural lymphatic movement. Recommended applications: General lymphatic-drainage sessions Fluid-movement support Tired or heavy legs Wellness maintenance Recommended for: Wellness centers Beauty salons Body-contouring clinics Businesses adding lymphatic-massage services Program 2: Water-Retention Support
A customizable compression program for clients concerned about temporary water retention and feelings of heaviness. Recommended applications: Leg and thigh treatments Waist and abdomen programs Full-body compression sessions General body-wellness services Recommended for: Spa treatment packages Body-care programs Wellness memberships Clients seeking a lighter, refreshed feeling Program 3: Recovery and Circulation
A rhythmic compression program designed to support circulation and recovery-focused services. Recommended applications: Post-workout recovery Tired-leg programs Muscle-relaxation sessions Suitable professional recovery protocols Recommended for: Physiotherapy clinics Fitness and recovery centers Sports-wellness businesses Medical spas offering recovery services Program 4: Body-Contouring Add-On
A complementary program for suitable clients receiving body-contouring treatments. Recommended applications: Cryolipolysis treatment courses Cavitation programs Radiofrequency body treatments Other suitable contouring services Recommended for: Body-contouring clinics Aesthetic centers Medical spas Businesses creating combination treatment packages Adjustable Compression for Customized Treatments
The Pressotherapy Machine provides adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection. Each setting should be selected according to the treatment area, client comfort and professional objective. The adjustable settings give trained operators greater control over treatment intensity and client comfort. The correct program must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment areas. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The supplied full-body garment supports targeted and comprehensive compression programs. Leg Treatments
Thighs Lower legs Tired-leg programs Leg-heaviness treatments Recovery-oriented sessions Arm Treatments
Upper arms Lower arms General circulation support Relaxation programs Suitable recovery treatments Waist and Abdomen Treatments
Waist Abdomen General body-wellness programs Water-retention support Body-contouring add-on services Professional Wellness and Recovery Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected pressure, intensity, duration and compression program. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, treatment goals and suitability. Target areas, pressure level, treatment duration and program are then selected. 2. Garment Preparation
The client is positioned comfortably, and the appropriate garment sections are fitted over the selected treatment areas. The operator confirms that all air-hose connections are secure. 3. Parameter Selection
Pressure, intensity, duration and treatment program are selected according to the client’s comfort, treatment area and professional protocol. 4. Treatment Application
The machine sequentially inflates and deflates the overlapping air chambers, producing rhythmic waves of compression across the selected areas. A typical session lasts approximately 20–45 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the session, the garment is removed and the client receives appropriate wellness and aftercare guidance. Some clients may return to normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary pressure marks, mild tenderness, increased urination or other short-term responses may occur. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital touchscreen control with adjustable air-compression programs for streamlined use in professional settings. Key operating advantages include: Digital touchscreen control Multiple overlapping air chambers Sequential compression technology Adjustable pressure and intensity Customizable treatment duration Preset wellness programs Full-body treatment garment Face-to-face and add-on service flexibility Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, full-body compression garment and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Pressotherapy control system Full-body compression garment Leg garment sections Arm garment sections Waist and abdomen garment sections Multiple overlapping air chambers Air-hose connection components Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine setup guidance Garment-fitting instructions Air-hose connection guidance Pressure and intensity selection Treatment-program guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Garment fitting Air-hose connections Touchscreen operation Pressure and intensity adjustment Treatment-duration selection Program selection Client positioning Basic treatment protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Air compressor and internal pressure components Original connection hoses Garment connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect pressure or program selection Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of garments, hoses and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional wellness equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active deep-vein thrombosis or suspected blood clots Severe peripheral vascular disease Uncontrolled cardiovascular conditions Severe heart failure Acute infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin conditions Unexplained swelling Severe kidney disease Severe liver disease Untreated hypertension Impaired sensation Recent surgery without appropriate clearance Other contraindications listed in the operating manual The compression garment must be fitted correctly, and the selected pressure must remain comfortable throughout treatment. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Wellness centers Medical spas Physiotherapy clinics Body-contouring studios Fitness and recovery centers Professional massage providers Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their wellness services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose This Pressotherapy System?
Offer a Comfortable Wellness Service
Sequential air compression provides a rhythmic and relaxing treatment experience that can be added to professional wellness menus. Treat Multiple Body Areas
The supplied garment supports treatments for the legs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body. Customize Every Session
Adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The system can support standalone lymphatic-massage services, recovery programs, wellness packages and suitable body-contouring add-ons. Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is pressotherapy?
Pressotherapy is a compression-massage treatment that uses multiple air chambers to apply rhythmic pressure to selected body areas. The chambers inflate and deflate sequentially to support lymphatic movement, circulation and relaxation. How does sequential air compression work?
The garment contains overlapping air chambers that inflate and deflate in a controlled sequence. This creates a wave-like compression massage across the selected treatment areas. Which areas can be treated?
The supplied garment supports professional treatments for the legs, thighs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body. How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 20–45 minutes. Treatment time can be adjusted according to the selected program, treatment area and client comfort. How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional program may include 6–12 sessions. The final number and frequency should be selected according to the client’s condition, objectives and response. Is pressotherapy uncomfortable?
The treatment is designed to provide rhythmic compression. Pressure and intensity can be adjusted according to client comfort. The treatment should not cause pain. Can pressotherapy be combined with other treatments?
It may be offered as a complementary service alongside suitable cryolipolysis, cavitation, radiofrequency and other body-contouring programs following professional assessment. Is there downtime?
Most suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Individual responses may vary. Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Normal garment wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Professional Pressotherapy to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device combines: Sequential air-compression technology Adjustable pressure and treatment programs Full-body garment coverage Professional wellness and recovery applications Three-year parts warranty and lifetime support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment programs, package contents and professional training. Order Your Pressotherapy Machine and Request a Quote Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Treatment Program
Recommended Application
Gentle Compression
Relaxation, first-time clients and comfort-focused treatments
Standard Compression
General lymphatic-drainage and wellness programs
Targeted Compression
Selected legs, arms, waist or abdomen treatments
Full-Body Program
Comprehensive wellness and compression-massage sessions
Treatment Area
Applicable Program
Intended Wellness Application
Legs and thighs
Sequential compression
Lymphatic-drainage and tired-leg support
Arms
Targeted compression
General circulation and recovery support
Waist and abdomen
Targeted compression
Body wellness and water-retention support
Full body
Full-body compression
Comprehensive relaxation and wellness
Lower body
Recovery program
Post-workout and muscle-recovery support
Body-contouring areas
Add-on program
Complementary treatment-course support
Tired or heavy legs
Gentle or standard compression
Comfort and relaxation
General wellness
Customized program
Maintenance-oriented compression massage
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device
Product Type
Professional air-compression therapy system
Technology
Sequential air-pressure compression
Functions
Lymphatic drainage, wellness, recovery and body-care support
Treatment Areas
Legs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body
Compression System
Multiple overlapping air chambers
Session Duration
Approximately 20–45 minutes
Recommended Protocol
Commonly 6–12 sessions, depending on client assessment
Customization
Adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection
Treatment Application
Fully clothed, non-invasive compression massage
Safety Features
Pressure-limit controls, automatic shut-off and protective sensors
Control Interface
Digital touchscreen with preset wellness programs
Power Supply
110V–240V
Package Contents
Machine, full-body garment, power cable and manual
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$1,899.00
Professional Two-Handle Portable HI-EMT Body-Sculpting System Compact Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across targeted body areas. High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology produces approximately 20,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute session. Its two ergonomic applicators support focused or bilateral treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks. With a lightweight portable design, adjustable energy settings, intelligent digital controls, and an air-cooling system, the machine is suitable for mobile beauty professionals, small salons, clinics, wellness facilities, and approved home users. Portable HI-EMT | Two ergonomic handles | Approximately 20,000 contractions | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock muscle stimulation Thigh muscle conditioning Upper-arm toning Body-definition programs Professional fitness treatments Focused Body Contouring
The two applicators can be positioned over suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Buttock shaping Thigh definition Upper-arm conditioning Bilateral muscle stimulation Sequential multi-area treatments Portable Professional Operation
The compact construction supports professional services in facilities with limited space and suitable mobile treatment environments. Common benefits include: Easier professional transportation Reduced storage requirements Small treatment-room compatibility Focused two-handle operation Flexible service locations Approved personal-use capability Select the Right Program for Each Client Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses one or two applicators to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Core-area stimulation Midsection definition General abdomen sculpting Fitness-support programs Recommended for: Clients seeking improved abdominal tone Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation Clients following healthy lifestyle programs Buttock-Toning Program
Positions both applicators over suitable buttock muscle areas to support balanced conditioning. Recommended applications: Buttock muscle stimulation Toning and firmness support Bilateral buttock treatments Shape-enhancement programs Lower-body conditioning Recommended for: Clients seeking improved buttock tone Clients combining treatment with exercise Clients receiving lower-body programs Thigh and Arm Program
Uses the two applicators sequentially or bilaterally across suitable thigh or upper-arm areas. Recommended applications: Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Upper-arm muscle stimulation Bilateral limb treatments Arm and thigh definition General muscle conditioning Recommended for: Clients seeking improved arm or thigh tone Clients interested in upper- or lower-body conditioning Fitness and body-contouring clients Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment after completion of the client’s initial EMSlim course. Recommended applications: Muscle-tone maintenance Body-contour maintenance Fitness-program support Seasonal body-sculpting treatments Recommended for: Returning EMSlim clients Clients completing four to six initial sessions Approved home users following the supplied instructions Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device allows treatments to be customized according to the body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol. Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen
One or two applicators can be positioned over suitable abdominal muscle groups for focused midsection treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle activation Core-area conditioning Improved muscle definition Midsection body sculpting Bilateral abdominal treatment Buttocks and Thighs
The two applicators support focused, sequential, or bilateral lower-body programs. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Lower-body definition Bilateral muscle treatment General lower-body sculpting Upper Arms
The applicators can be positioned over suitable upper-arm muscle groups according to the supplied placement guidance. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Biceps conditioning Triceps conditioning Bilateral arm treatment Improved-looking arm definition Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment area and position one or both applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. Correct placement is essential for balanced muscle stimulation. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with a conservative energy level. Increase the intensity progressively according to client comfort and muscle response. Step 4: HI-EMT Treatment
The machine delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment area, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations. Designed for Professional and Portable Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device combines HI-EMT performance with a compact and transportable design. Key advantages include: Professional HI-EMT technology Two ergonomic treatment applicators Approximately 20,000 contractions per session Focused and bilateral treatment capability Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks Adjustable energy intensity Intelligent digital control interface Air-cooling system Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Four- to six-session treatment programs Lightweight and compact construction Easier transportation and storage 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim main unit 2 × Ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators Applicator connection cables Applicator-positioning accessories Intelligent digital control interface Adjustable energy controls Integrated air-cooling system 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Applicator-placement guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Abdominal treatment protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Mobile-use guidance Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device includes operating guidance to help professionals and approved home users operate the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Intelligent control operation Client consultation and screening Treatment-area assessment Correct applicator placement Focused and bilateral configurations Energy-level adjustment Abdominal treatment protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Client monitoring Safe transportation and storage Post-treatment guidance Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, transport damage, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper transportation, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before treatment. The machine should only be operated according to the supplied instructions. Treatment may not be suitable for users with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Cardiac rhythm disorders Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active muscle injury Severe inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery within the treatment area Serious neurological or muscular conditions Reduced or impaired sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Users with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment. Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use. Place the machine on a stable, dry surface. Ensure ventilation openings remain unobstructed. Remove metal objects from the treatment area. Confirm correct applicator placement before activation. Secure both handles according to the supplied instructions. Begin with a conservative energy level. Increase intensity progressively according to user comfort. Monitor muscle response and user condition throughout treatment. Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas. Record treatment area, duration, and energy settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every professional client. Transport the machine using suitable protective packaging. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device is suitable for appropriately trained operators and approved users in: Mobile beauty services Small beauty salons Body-contouring studios Wellness centers Medical spas Fitness facilities Professional clinics Personal home wellness environments Professional operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HI-EMT treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device? Compact Portable Design
The lightweight construction supports easier transportation, storage, and use in facilities with limited space. Two Ergonomic Applicators
Two handles support focused, sequential, and bilateral treatments for suitable muscle groups. Professional HI-EMT Technology
The system provides approximately 20,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session. Simple Controls and Air Cooling
The intelligent digital interface and air-cooling system support straightforward portable operation. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator-placement guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device?
It is a compact HI-EMT body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation and body-conditioning treatments. What makes the machine portable?
Its lightweight, compact construction is designed for easier carrying, storage, and transportation between suitable treatment locations. How does HI-EMT technology work?
The machine delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions during treatment. How many applicators are included?
The package includes two ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators. Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, upper arms, thighs, and buttocks. Can both applicators operate simultaneously?
Yes. The two handles support focused or bilateral treatment according to the selected protocol. How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments. What does the treatment feel like?
Users experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy can be increased progressively according to comfort and muscle response. Is there downtime?
Users can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced following exercise may occur. Can HI-EMT replace regular exercise?
HI-EMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits. When may users notice changes?
Some users may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course. What performance figures are supplied?
Muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes. How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies. Can the machine be used at home?
The supplied information indicates home-wellness suitability. Home users must follow the operating manual, contraindications, applicator-placement instructions, and recommended treatment schedule. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response. What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses air cooling to support stable portable operation. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, transportation, maintenance, safety, and troubleshooting. Add Portable HI-EMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device enables mobile professionals, small salons, clinics, and wellness practitioners to provide focused electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments with a compact system. Five key benefits: Portable HI-EMT technology with approximately 20,000 contractions Two ergonomic applicators for focused or bilateral treatments Compact design for transportation and space-efficient storage Intelligent digital controls with air cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, portability details, package configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Technology
HI-EMT
Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation
Treatment Handles
Two
Focused, sequential, or bilateral treatments
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Intensive muscle activation
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Efficient treatment scheduling
Treatment Course
Four to six sessions
Structured body-sculpting program
Treatment Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Progressive muscle conditioning
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Personalized user comfort
Cooling System
Air cooling
Supports stable portable operation
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Configuration
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
One or two handles
Core Area
Focused muscle activation
Bilateral or targeted placement
Buttocks
Toning and shape-enhancement support
Two-handle bilateral treatment
Inner Thighs
Lower-body conditioning
Sequential or bilateral treatment
Outer Thighs
Thigh definition and muscle stimulation
Sequential or bilateral treatment
Upper Arms
Arm muscle stimulation and definition
Sequential or bilateral treatment
Multiple Areas
Structured body-sculpting program
Sequential treatment sessions
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Two-Handle Portable EMSlim Device
Machine Power
6500W
Magnetic Field Strength
14 Tesla
RF Function
No (EMS / HI-EMT only)
Net Weight
Approximately 40 kg
Machine Dimensions
60 × 54 × 62 cm
Display
8-inch intelligent touchscreen
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
Design
Portable, lightweight, and compact
Treatment Handles
Two ergonomic applicators
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Primary Functions
Muscle conditioning and body contouring
Supplied Performance Figures
Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Treatment Configuration
Focused, sequential, or bilateral
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Four to six sessions
Recommended Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Cooling System
Air cooling
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Use Cases
Mobile professionals, small salons, clinics, and approved home use
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
$699.00
Professional Photon LED Anti-Aging System 630–660nm Red Light Therapy for Skin Rejuvenation and Collagen Support The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine is a professional LED light therapy system developed for skin rejuvenation, wrinkle care, collagen support, complexion brightening, and general anti-aging treatments. The machine delivers red light at wavelengths between 630nm and 660nm. This non-invasive light therapy supports cellular activity and the skin’s natural renewal processes without needles, incisions, or abrasive treatments. With 15–30-minute sessions, digital or touchscreen controls, dual-voltage compatibility, and professional and home-use options, the system is suitable for beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, spas, skincare studios, and personal beauty routines. 630–660nm red light | Professional and home use | Non-invasive treatment | CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform 630–660nm Photon LED Therapy
The system emits red light within the 630–660nm wavelength range for controlled skin-rejuvenation treatments. Common applications include: General facial rejuvenation Fine-line and wrinkle care Skin-radiance programs Texture-improvement treatments Neck and décolletage care Hand-rejuvenation programs Collagen and Elastin Support
Red light therapy supports cellular energy activity and the skin’s natural collagen and elastin processes. Common applications include: Reduced skin firmness Early signs of aging Fine-line care Skin-elasticity support Improved-looking texture General age-management programs Complexion and Skin-Quality Care
Photon LED treatments can be incorporated into professional services designed to support a brighter and more even-looking complexion. Common applications include: Dull-looking skin Uneven-looking skin tone Age-spot appearance Pigmentation-appearance care Post-acne skin support General skin-radiance programs Select the Right Program for Each Client Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses the red light function for general facial skin-quality and age-management treatments. Recommended applications: Fine lines and wrinkles Reduced skin radiance Uneven-looking texture Early signs of aging General facial rejuvenation Recommended for: Clients seeking non-invasive facial care Clients concerned about visible signs of aging Clients wanting progressive skin-quality support Firmness and Elasticity Program
Provides a structured treatment course focused on collagen support and improved-looking skin firmness. Recommended applications: Reduced facial firmness Neck and décolletage treatments Skin-elasticity support Fine-line care General collagen-support programs Recommended for: Mature-skin clients Clients concerned about reduced elasticity Clients receiving professional anti-aging treatments Brightening and Tone Program
Uses regular photon treatments to support a brighter and more even-looking complexion. Recommended applications: Dull-looking skin Uneven-looking tone Age-spot appearance Pigmentation-appearance care Skin-radiance programs Recommended for: Clients seeking improved-looking brightness Clients concerned about uneven tone Clients receiving seasonal skincare programs Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatments after completion of the client’s initial photon therapy course. Recommended applications: Skin-radiance maintenance Fine-line care Collagen-support maintenance General anti-aging skincare Continued complexion care Recommended for: Returning photon therapy clients Clients completing a four- to six-week course Home users following the supplied instructions Adjustable Treatment Duration and Frequency
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine allows treatments to be scheduled according to the client’s skin condition, treatment objectives, and professional protocol. Session duration and treatment frequency should be selected according to the supplied instructions, client response, skin sensitivity, and professional assessment. Adjustable Treatment Areas Face
The photon LED system supports non-invasive facial treatments for different age-management and skin-quality objectives. Common treatment objectives include: Fine-line care Wrinkle-appearance reduction Complexion brightening Improved-looking texture General skin rejuvenation Neck and Décolletage
Red light therapy can be incorporated into professional treatments for suitable neck and upper-chest areas. Common treatment objectives include: Neck-line care Improved-looking firmness Décolletage rejuvenation Skin-radiance support Collagen-support programs Hands and Body
Suitable configurations support treatments for the hands and selected body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Hand-rejuvenation treatments Age-spot appearance care Body skin-texture support Post-acne skin care General skin-quality improvement Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s skin condition, treatment objectives, medications, previous procedures, photosensitivity, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Skin Preparation
Clean the selected treatment area and remove makeup, skincare products, jewelry, and reflective accessories. Step 3: Treatment Setup
Position the machine correctly, select the treatment duration and available settings, and provide appropriate eye protection. Step 4: Photon LED Treatment
Activate the red light for approximately 15–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort and skin response throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Switch off the system, inspect the treated area, document the treatment duration and settings, and provide suitable skincare and sun-protection guidance. Designed for Professional and Personal Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine combines professional red light therapy with straightforward digital operation. Key advantages include: 630–660nm photon LED technology Non-invasive red light treatment Facial and body treatment capability Fine-line and wrinkle-care programs Collagen and elastin support Complexion-brightening treatments Approximately 15–30-minute sessions Digital or touchscreen controls Professional salon and spa use Suitable home-use configuration 110V and 220V compatibility CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine Integrated 630–660nm red light treatment system Digital or touchscreen control interface Region-compatible power adapter Power cable Standard machine accessories Eye-protection accessories according to package Warranty card The exact control interface and accessory configuration should follow the selected model and package. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety instructions Treatment-duration guidance Facial-treatment protocols Neck and décolletage protocols Hand and body treatment guidance Client-consultation materials Eye-safety guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine includes operating guidance to help professionals and approved home users operate the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Digital or touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Photosensitivity assessment Treatment-area preparation Correct machine positioning Session-duration selection Facial treatment protocols Neck and décolletage treatments Hand and body protocols Eye-protection requirements Post-treatment skincare Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Eye-protection accessories, power adapters, cables, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, liquid exposure, improper storage, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and skin assessment should be completed before treatment. The device should be operated according to the supplied instructions. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy without appropriate medical guidance Photosensitive medical conditions Photosensitizing medications Active skin cancer or a history requiring medical assessment Active infection or open wounds within the treatment area Severe skin inflammation Recent aggressive skin treatments Medical conditions affected by light exposure Reduced or impaired skin sensation Conditions requiring physician supervision Clients using prescription retinoids, photosensitizing skincare, or photosensitizing medication should receive appropriate professional guidance before treatment. Eye protection should be used according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Clients should not look directly into the active LED light source. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, power adapter, cable, and accessories before use. Complete a consultation and photosensitivity assessment. Clean the treatment area before beginning. Remove makeup, jewelry, and reflective items. Position the machine according to the supplied instructions. Use appropriate eye protection. Follow the recommended treatment duration. Do not exceed the supplied usage frequency. Monitor client comfort and skin response. Do not use over prohibited or unsuitable areas. Clean the equipment after every professional client. Stop treatment if unexpected discomfort or skin reaction occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators and approved users in: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Professional spas Skin-rejuvenation studios Wellness centers Anti-aging treatment facilities Personal home beauty environments Professional operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering LED light therapy. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine? Professional Red Light Wavelengths
The system delivers red light between 630nm and 660nm for non-invasive skin-rejuvenation and collagen-support programs. Multiple Skin-Care Applications
One system supports fine-line care, wrinkle-appearance treatments, complexion brightening, texture improvement, and general skin rejuvenation. Face and Body Versatility
Suitable configurations support treatments for the face, neck, décolletage, hands, and selected body areas. Professional and Home-Use Flexibility
Straightforward digital controls and adjustable treatment duration support professional services and approved personal use. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, treatment protocols, CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine?
It is a red light therapy system developed for skin rejuvenation, fine-line care, complexion brightening, collagen support, and general anti-aging treatments. What wavelengths does the machine use?
The system delivers red light within the 630–660nm wavelength range. How does photon red light therapy work?
Red light is absorbed by light-responsive components within cells and may support cellular energy activity and natural skin-renewal processes. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, décolletage, hands, and suitable body areas. How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 15–30 minutes. How often is treatment recommended?
Recommends three to four sessions per week for an initial four- to six-week course, followed by periodic maintenance. When may users notice changes?
Some users may notice early skin-quality changes within approximately two weeks, with progressive improvement over four to twelve weeks. Individual results vary. Is the treatment painful?
Red light therapy is generally non-invasive and does not create muscle contractions or abrasive sensations. Some users may notice mild warmth. Is there downtime?
Users can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Individual skin response may vary. Is eye protection required?
Appropriate eye protection should be used according to the supplied instructions. Users should never look directly into the active LED light source. Can the machine be used at home?
The supplied information indicates professional and home-use suitability. Home users must follow the operating manual, treatment schedule, safety guidance, and contraindications. Is it suitable for every skin type?
Red light therapy may be used across different skin types, but individual assessment remains important, especially for photosensitive conditions or medications. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to age, skin condition, treatment consistency, lifestyle, skincare routine, sun exposure, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment positioning, session duration, eye safety, treatment protocols, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Professional Photon Skin Rejuvenation to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine enables beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, spas, and skincare professionals to provide non-invasive red light therapy for facial and body rejuvenation. Five key benefits: Professional 630–660nm photon LED technology Fine-line, wrinkle, brightness, and collagen-support programs Treatments for the face, neck, hands, and selected body areas Professional and approved home-use flexibility CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, model details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support. Have questions about this product? Contact us for help with specifications, shipping, or choosing the right model. Email: cetin@wikbeauty.com
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Light Technology
Photon LED red light
Non-invasive skin-rejuvenation treatment
Wavelength Range
630–660nm
Red light therapy
Session Duration
Approximately 15–30 minutes
Customizable treatment time
Initial Course
Three to four sessions weekly
Structured skin-care program
Course Duration
Approximately four to six weeks
Progressive treatment planning
Maintenance
One to two sessions monthly
Continued skin-quality support
Control System
Digital or touchscreen, model-dependent
Treatment management
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Dual-voltage compatibility
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Program
Face
Fine-line care, radiance, and rejuvenation
Facial-rejuvenation program
Neck
Firmness and neck-line care
Firmness and elasticity program
Décolletage
Texture and skin-radiance support
Rejuvenation program
Hands
Age-spot appearance and texture care
Brightening and tone program
Selected Body Areas
General skin-quality support
Professionally selected program
Post-Acne Areas
Texture and skin-recovery support
Suitable skin-quality program
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Photon Anti-Aging Machine
Technology
Photon LED red light therapy
Wavelength Range
630–660nm
Primary Functions
Skin rejuvenation, fine-line care, brightening, and collagen support
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, décolletage, hands, and selected body areas
Session Duration
Approximately 15–30 minutes
Recommended Initial Course
Three to four sessions weekly for four to six weeks
Suggested Maintenance
One to two sessions monthly
Display and Controls
Digital or touchscreen, model-dependent
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Use Cases
Professional and home use
Skin-Type Suitability
Suitable for different skin types following assessment
Certificates
CE, RoHS, and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
WhatsApp: +86 130 1128 7202
Buying guide
Wikbeauty Beauty & Wellness Machines Collection
Discover the ultimate collection of beauty and wellness devices from Wikbeauty, designed to help you achieve professional-grade results from the comfort of your home. Our diverse range of products includes advanced technologies such as RF cavitation, lipo laser, EMS muscle sculpting, HIFU, cryolipolysis, and microneedling. Whether you're looking for body contouring, skin rejuvenation, fat reduction, or muscle toning, our machines are tailored to meet every need. From the Wikbeauty 30K/40K Vacuum RF Cavitation Device and Lipo Laser Machines to the EMSZero Muscle Sculpting Machine and Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine, each device offers a specialized solution for tightening skin, lifting muscles, and enhancing your natural beauty. Our Wikbeauty Morpheus8 RF microneedling and Wetamorph Golden Youth RF Microneedling Machine provide non-invasive skin rejuvenation, while devices like the 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System Facial Machine and Wikbeauty 7D Face Lifting Body Slimming HIFU Machine cater to your full body and facial needs. Achieve smoother skin, improved muscle tone, and a youthful appearance with our wide array of tools, all crafted with cutting-edge technology for effective and lasting results.
Wait — here's $50 off your order
Looks like you left something behind. Complete your order now and take $50 off with code COMEBACK50 — no minimum purchase required.
- Choosing a selection results in a full page refresh.
- Opens in a new window.